Citizen CL S700 Technical Manual User To The 1e0342dc 8bdd 4c71 8454 B09fe8ca3f92
User Manual: Citizen CL-S700 to the manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 257
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Technical Manual CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer CL-S700 CL-S703 CL-S700R JN74928-10F 1.02E-1012 Copyright © 2010 by CITIZEN SYSTEMS JAPAN CO., LTD. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R ii CHAPTER 1 SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES CHAPTER 3 DISASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 5 PARTS LISTS CHAPTER 6 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS APPENDICES iii CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Safety Precautions To prevent personal injury or property damage, the following shall be strictly observed. The degree of possible injury and damage due to incorrect use/maintenance or improperly following instructions is described below. Warning Caution Indicates a situation which, if not observed and handled properly, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a situation which, if not observed and handled properly, could result in injury or property damage. : This is a mark to call attention to the reader. Warning - Before starting disassembly/reassembly or mechanical adjustment, be sure to disconnect the power cord from the power source. - Do not replace a fuse with the power switch turned on. - When replacing a fuse, use the same rating and type since it is provided to prevent fire and damage to the “Unit, Power Supply”. Caution - DO NOT adjust VR1, VR2, VR3 and VR4 on the “SA, Main PCB”. (Leave them at the factory setting condition.) If it is turned, media sensor sensitivity is changed and the media detection will not be correctly made. - Do not disassemble/reassemble or adjust the machine, if it functions properly. Particularly, do not loosen screws on any component, unless necessary. - After completing an inspection and before turning on the power, be sure to check that there is no abnormality. - Never try to print without media. - Check that the media is properly set. - Do not lay anything on the cover or lean against it during maintenance or while the printer is in operation. - During maintenance, be careful not to leave parts or screws unattached or loose inside the printer. - When handling a printed circuit board, do not use gloves, etc., which can easily cause static electricity. Since ICs, such as CPU, RAM and ROM, might be destroyed by static electricity, do not touch lead wires or windows unnecessarily. - Do not put the printed circuit boards directly on the printer or on the floor. - When disassembling or reassembling, check wires for any damage and do not pinch or damage them. Also, run wires as they were. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R iv Chapter 1 Specifications CHAPTER 1 SPECIFICATIONS CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 1 Specifications Chapter 1 Specifications Table of Contents 1-1. 1-2. 1-3. 1-4. General Specifications .................................................................................................... 1-3 Printable Area ................................................................................................................. 1-9 Printing Position Accuracy .............................................................................................. 1-10 Adjustable Sensors/Front Fixed Sensor ......................................................................... 1-11 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 1-2 Chapter 1 Specifications 1-1. General Specifications 1-1. General Specifications Printing Printing method Resolution Max. print width Max. print length Print density Printing speed setting Print mode Batch mode Tear off mode Cut mode *1 Peel mode*2 Media Types of media Thermal transfer/Direct thermal Main scanning line density: 203 dots/inch (8 dots/mm) (CL-S700/CL-S700R) 300 dots/inch (11.8 dots/mm) (CL-S703) Sub-scanning line density: 203 dots/inch (8 dots/mm) (CL-S700/CL-S700R) 300 dots/inch (11.8 dots/mm) (CL-S703) Head 864 dots (printable dots: 832 dots) (CL-S700/CL-S700R) Head 1275 dots (printable dots: 1240 dots) (CL-S703) 104 mm (CL-S700/CL-S700R) 4.1 inch (CL-S700/CL-S700R) 105 mm (CL-S703) 4.1 inch (CL-S703) 812.8 mm 32 inch Print density is adjustable with software 2 - 10 inches per second (CL-S700/CL-S700R) 2 - 8 inches per second (CL-S703) *2-7 inches per second (CL-S700/CL-S703 with optional peeler) Normal printing (single or multiple sheets) Feeds back media to the tear-off position after printing is completed. Prints while cutting at designated sheet units. The following two kinds of cut mode operations are done. • Back feed • Cut through (Cut through refers to stopping part-way through printing the ‘next label’ to make the cut. After cutting, printing restarts but there is a chance of a small gap or mark at the temporary stop position.) Peels labels from the liners after printing them. Roll, fanfold (continuous media, die-cuts, continuous tags, paper or tickets) Recommended media Thermal transfer: label media (RPR-W Ricoh) Direct thermal media: label media (150LA-1 Ricoh), tag media (TB2E0V, Mitsubishi Paper) Max. media width 118.0 mm 4.65" Min. media width 25.4 mm 1.00" Min. label width 7.62 mm 0.30" *1,*2: Options can be separately purchased. 1-3 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 1 Specifications 1-1. General Specifications Min. label pitch*3 Max. media thickness Max. media length Min. media length Min. media thickness Media (continued) On-board roll media diameter 6.35 mm 0.254 mm 812.8 mm 6.35 mm 0.0635 mm 0.25" 0.01" 32" 0.25" 0.0025" Max. outside diameter: 203 mm Media core: 38 to 76 mm Media core: 26, 40, or 45 mm 8" 1.5 to 3" 1.02, 1.57, or 1.77” Rewinding roll media diameter (CL-S700R only) Ribbon Recommended ribbon B110A Ricoh Max. ribbon width 114.0 mm 4.50" Min. ribbon width 25.4 mm 1.00" Min. ribbon length 450.0 m 1,476 ft Max. roll diameter 86.5 mm 3.40" Inner diameter of the 25.4 ± 0.25 mm 1.00 ± 0.01" paper core Ribbon end tape Max. 80.0 mm 3.15" length Ribbon end detection Ribbon out is detected by the ribbon sensor. Bar code For Datamax® emulation*4 One-dimension • Code 3 of 9 • UPC-A • UPC-E • EAN-13 (JAN-13) • EAN-8 (JAN-8) • Interleaved 2 of 5 • Code 128 • HIBC (Modulus 43-used code 3 of 9) • Codabar (NW-7) • Int 2 of 5 (Modulus 10-used Interleaved 2 of 5) • Plessey • Case Code • UPC 2DIG ADD • UPC 5DIG ADD • Code 93 • Telepen • ZIP • UCC/EAN 128 • UCC/EAN128 (for K-MART) • UCC/EAN128 Random Weight • FIM Two-dimension • UPS Maxi Code • PDF-417 • Data Matrix • QR Code • Aztec • RSS *3: When a media pitch of less than 1" is used, activate the "Small Label Printing" setting in the "Printing Setting". *4: Datamax® is a registered trademark of Datamax Bar Code Products Corporation. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 1-4 Chapter 1 Specifications 1-1. General Specifications Bar code (continued) For Zebra® emulation*5 One-dimension • Code 11 • Interleaved 2 of 5 • Code 39 • EAN-8 • UPC-E • Code 93 • Code 128 • EAN-13 • Industrial 2 of 5 • Standard 2 of 5 • ANSI CODABAR • LOGMARS • MSI • Plessey • UPC/EAN Extensions • UPC-A • POSTNET • Planet Two-dimension • Code 49 • PDF-417 • CODA BLOCK • UPS Maxi Code • Micro PDF-417 • Data Matrix • QR Code • R SS • TLC39 Font For Datamax® emulation*4 1. Seven kinds of fixed pitch font Overseas, English fonts and European fonts 2. OCR fonts OCR-A*6, OCR-B*6 3. Proportional fonts CG TriumvirateTM smooth font CG TriumvirateTM Bold smooth font (6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48 points) (CL-S700/CL-S700R) (4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48 points) (CL-S703) • Character set: Conforms with code page 850 standards 4. TrueTypeTM rasterizer *7 For Zebra® emulation*5 1. Five kinds of fixed pitch font Overseas, English fonts and European fonts 2. OCR fonts OCR-A, OCR-B 3. Proportional font CG TriumvirateTM Condensed Bold 4. True type™ rasterizer*7 *5: Zebra® is a registered trade mark of ZIH corp. *6: The OCR font may have a low recognition rate according to the reader. *7: It is equipped with UFSTTM and TrueTypeTM rasterizer that are licensed from Monotype Imaging, Inc. TrueTypeTM is a trademark of Apple Computer. UFSTTM and CG TriumvirateTM are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. 1-5 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 1 Specifications 1-1. General Specifications Symbol set PC866U Ukraina, PC Cyrillic, ISO 60 Danish/Norwegian, DeskTop, ISO 8859/1 Latin 1, ISO 8859/2 Latin 2, ISO 8859/9 Latin 5, ISO 8859/10 Latin 6, ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek, ISO 8859/15 Latin 9, ISO 8859/5 Latin/Cyrillic, ISO 69: French, ISO 21: German, ISO 15: Italian, Legal, Math-8, Macintosh, Math, PC-858 Multilingual, Microsoft Publishing, PC-8, Code Page 437, PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N, PC-852 Latin 2, PC-851 Latin/Greek, PC-862 Latin/Hebrew, Pi Font, PC-850 Multilingual, PC-864 Latin/Arabic, PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T, PC-1004, PC-775 Baltic, Non-UGL, Generic Pi Font, Roman-8, Roman-9, ISO 17: Spanish, ISO 11: Swedish, Symbol, PS Text, ISO 4: United Kingdom, ISO 6: ASCII, Ventura International, Ventura Math, Ventura US, Windows 3.1 Latin 1, Wingdings, Windows 3.1 Latin 2, Windows 3.1 Baltic (Latv, Lith), Windows 3.0 Latin 1, Windows Latin/Cyrillic, Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Control language Conforms to Datamax® programming language*4 and Zebra® programming language*5 Outline of electronic devices CPU 32-bit RISC CPU ROM Standard equipment: FLASH ROM 4M bytes (User area: 1M byte) RAM Standard equipment: SDRAM 16M bytes (User area: 1M byte) ® RAM (for Zebra L) Standard equipment: SDRAM 16MBytes (User area: 4M byte) Media detection sensors Transparent sensor Detects media gap between labels, notches on tags, and media out Reflective sensor Detects reflective mark on back of media and media out 1 Label peeling sensor * Communication interfaces Parallel*8 IEEE1284 (Compatible, Nibble, ECP mode) Serial 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps USB FULL Speed USB1.1 Communication interface options Network Wired Ethernet (10-BASE-T/ 100-BASE-TX) or Wireless LAN *8: This interface is Non-L. P. S. (Limited Power Source). CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 1-6 Chapter 1 Specifications 1-1. General Specifications Indications and switches LCD 128 X 64 dots, STN graphic type LED POWER, ERROR Buzzer Alarms, errors, etc. Operating panel keys PAUSE, FEED, STOP, MENU Head-up detection Detects head open. sensor Power switch Turns power on and off. Acoustic noise 55 dB (by EN ISO7779) Power supply (standards) 100-240V (-10%+6%), 3.5-1.5A, 50/60Hz U.S.A./Canada: UL60950-1, CSA No.60950-1, FCC Part 15 Subpart B (Class A) Europe: EN 60950-1, EN 55022 (ClassA), EN 55024, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3 Power consumption (max. value) U.S.A./Canada 130W (operating at 12.5% printing duty), 11W (standby) (CL-S700) (120V 95W (operating at 12.5% printing duty), 12W (standby) (CL-S703) 140W (operating at 12.5% printing duty), 12W (standby) (CL-S700R) Europe 120W (operating at 12.5% printing duty), 11W (standby) (CL-S700) (230V) 85W (operating at 12.5% printing duty), 11W (standby) (CL-S703) 130W (operating at 12.5% printing duty), 12W (standby) (CL-S700R) 1-7 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 1 Specifications 1-1. General Specifications Others Environment Operating temperature conditions: Operating temp. 0 to 40°C, humidity 30 to 80%, condensation free (Conditions: ventilation, and natural convection) Storage temperature conditions Temp. -20 to 60°C, humidity 5 to 85% (Conditions: ventilation, and natural convection) 85 Humidity % Humidity % 80 40 30 0 5 35 40 5 Temperature °C Operating assurance temperature Printing assurance temperature -20 60 Temperature °C Storage assurance temperature [Conditions assuring operation and printing] [Storage assurance condition] External dimensions (CL-S700/CL-S703) Approx. 255 (W) X 490 (D) X 265 (H) mm 10 (W) X 19.3 (D) X 10.4 (H)" External dimensions (CL-S700R) Approx. 254 (W) X 480 (D) X 375 (H) mm 10.2 (W) X 19.2 (D) X 15 (H)" Weight Approx. 13.3 kg (29.3 lb.) (CL-S700/CL-S703) Approx. 17.6 kg (38.7 lb.) (CL-S700R) Test label media, Test ribbon, CD-ROM (User’s Manual), Quick start guide, Head cleaner, Power cord, Media holder bar and Media holder guide, Ribbon holder, Paper core Auto-cutter unit, Peeler unit, Ethernet interface and Rewind kit Accessories Option CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 1-8 Chapter 1 Specifications 1-2. Printable Area 1-2. Printable Area The printable area of the printer is as follows: When media is set to the printer, it must be aligned with the media guide at the left of the printing mechanism. Though the available maximum media width is 118 mm (4.65"), there are unprintable areas on both sides: 2.5 mm (0.10") width is on the left side and 11.5 mm (0.45") (for CL-S700/ CL-S700R)/10.5 mm (0.41”) (for CL-S703) width on the right side. The left side unprintable area applies for any size media. Media guide Maximum media width: 118 mm (4.65") Unprintable area Printable area H R 2.5 mm (0.10") Reference end Direction of media feed MODEL CL-S700/CL-S700R CL-S703 H 104.0 mm (4.1”) 105.0 mm (4.1”) 1-9 R 11.5 mm (0.45”) 10.5 mm (0.41”) CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 1 Specifications 1-3. Printing Position Accuracy 1-3. Printing Position Accuracy By default, the printing start position is 2.5 mm (0.10") from the left end of the media and 1 mm (0.04") backward the leading edge of the label, U-shaped notch, or black mark. 2.5 mm (0.10") is the necessary value to avoid printing in the unprintable area as mentioned in 1-2 "Printable Area". The printing start position will deviate from the ideal position as follows: Printable area 100 ± 2 mm*4 (39.4 ± 0.08") 2.5 ± 1 mm*3 (0.10 ± 0.04") Unprintable area Unprintable area Maximum media width: 118 mm (4.65") 1 mm (0.04") Actual printing start position*1 1 ± 2 mm*2 (0.04 ± 0.08") Ideal printing start position 2.5 mm (0.10") Direction of media feed Reference edge (Paper guide) *1: *2: *3: *4: Actual printing start position. May deviates from the ideal one in the indicated range. Deviation of vertical positioning when printing position is set to 0. Deviation of horizontal positioning when printing position is set to 0. Deviation of vertical printing position when 100 mm is specified from the printing start position. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 1-10 Chapter 1 Specifications 1-4. Adjustable Sensors/Front Fixed Sensor 1-4. Adjustable Sensors/Front Fixed Sensor There are two types of media sensors (adjustable sensor located on the rear side of the printer and front fixed sensor located on the front left) that detect a label or tag position. They are selectable with the Sensor Select menu (“Rear Adj sensor” for adjustable sensor and “Front Fixed Sen” for front fixed sensor). By default, the adjustable sensor is selected and it covers wide range of media width. The front fixed sensor is suitable for printing narrower width media and, since it is located near the thermal head, more accurate detection of label or tag position will be expected. Adjustable sensor: Adjustable sensor consists of two media sensors; the upper sensor (transparent sensor) and the bottom sensor (reflective sensor). The upper sensor and bottom sensor are used to detect the labels on the liner or the U-shaped notches of tag. While, the bottom sensor is used to detect the black marks on tag. Both sensors are used to detect media end. By turning the adjustable sensor position knob, both transparent and reflective sensors move right and left simultaneously. As you turn the adjustable sensor position knob, the yellow mark that is located in front of the scale moves along the scale. The factory-set position of the sensors is 6.5mm (0.2559") from the media guide. In this position, the T mark is printed on the scale and this position is the same position as the front fixed sensor. For details about the adjustable sensors, refer to “2-1-3.Label/Tag Position Detection Mechanism". Center Media guide 0 to 59 mm (0 to 2.32") Moveable range of sensors T: Upper sensor (LED) S: Lower sensor (Phototransistor) S: Lower sensor (LED) 2.5 mm (0.10") Direction of media feed Media Unprintable area Unprintable area 6.5 mm (0.2559") Factory-set position Printable area 11.5 mm (0.45") 104.0 mm (4.1") (CL-S700/CL-S700R) 105.0 mm (4.1”) (CL-S703) Maximum media width: 118 mm (4.65") 11.5 mm (0.45”) (CL-S700/CL-S700R) 10.5 mm (0.41”) (CL-S703) 1-11 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 1 Specifications 1-4. Adjustable Sensors/Front Fixed Sensor Front fixed sensor: It is basically the same as the adjustable sensor except that the front fixed sensor is not adjustable. Media guide T: Upper sensor (LED) Center S: Lower sensor (Phototransistor) S: Lower sensor (LED) 6.5 mm (0.2559") 2.5 mm (0.10") Printable area 104.0 mm (4.1") (CL-S700/CL-S700R) 105.0 mm (4.1”) (CL-S703) Direction of media feed CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Maximum media width: 118 mm (4.65") 11.5 mm (0.45”) (CL-S700/CL-S700R) 10.5 mm (0.41”) (CL-S703) 1-12 Unprintable area Unprintable area Media 11.5 mm (0.45") Chapter 2 Operating Principles CHAPTER 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles Chapter 2 Operating Principles Table of Contents 2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism ....................................................................................... 2-4 2-1-1. Locations of Main Electrical Parts ...................................................................... 2-4 (1) CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700 (Printer Part) ................................................ 2-4 (2) CL-S700 (Rewinder Part) .......................................................................... 2-6 2-1-2. Media Feed Mechanism ..................................................................................... 2-7 2-1-3. Label/Tag Position Detection Mechanism .......................................................... 2-8 2-1-4. Top Cover Open Detection Mechanism.............................................................. 2-9 2-1-5. Print Head Up/Down Detection Mechanism ....................................................... 2-10 2-1-6. Head Balance Adjustment Mechanism............................................................... 2-11 2-1-7. Media Thickness Adjustment Mechanism .......................................................... 2-12 2-1-8. Rewinder Cover Open Detection Mechanism (CL-S700R only)......................... 2-13 2-1-9. Rewinding Mechanism (CL-S700R only) ........................................................... 2-14 2-2. Operation of Control Parts .............................................................................................. 2-15 2-2-1. Configuration of Printer ...................................................................................... 2-15 (1) AC Inlet & Power Switch/Filter & Power Supply section............................ 2-16 (2) Main PCB .................................................................................................. 2-16 (3) Operation panel ......................................................................................... 2-17 (4) Thermal print head .................................................................................... 2-17 (5) Sensors ..................................................................................................... 2-17 (6) Motors........................................................................................................ 2-17 (7) Parallel I/F (IEEE1284).............................................................................. 2-18 (8) Serial I/F (RS-232C) .................................................................................. 2-18 (9) USB (Universal Serial Bus) I/F .................................................................. 2-18 (10) Ethernet I/F (Option).................................................................................. 2-18 (11) Wireless LAN I/F (Option).......................................................................... 2-18 (12) Connect PCB............................................................................................. 2-18 2-2-2. Memory Map ...................................................................................................... 2-19 2-2-3. Sensors .............................................................................................................. 2-20 (1) Top cover open sensor .............................................................................. 2-20 (2) Head up sensor ......................................................................................... 2-21 (3) Adjustable Sensor ..................................................................................... 2-22 (4) Front Fixed Sensor .................................................................................... 2-24 (5) Head temperature sensor.......................................................................... 2-25 (6) PF motor temperature sensor.................................................................... 2-26 (7) Ribbon encoder ......................................................................................... 2-27 (8) Rewinder cover open sensor (CL-S700R only) ......................................... 2-28 (9) Rewinder motor temperature sensor (CL-S700R only) ............................. 2-29 (10) Peel sensor (CL-S700R only) .................................................................. 2-30 2-2-4. Drivers ................................................................................................................ 2-31 (1) PF motor driver.......................................................................................... 2-31 (2) Head driver ................................................................................................ 2-32 (3) Rewinder motor driver (CL-S700R only) ................................................... 2-34 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-2 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel.............................................................................................................. 2-36 2-3-1. External view ...................................................................................................... 2-36 (1) Keys........................................................................................................... 2-36 (2) LEDs.......................................................................................................... 2-36 (3) LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) ..................................................................... 2-36 2-3-2. Menu setup mode............................................................................................... 2-37 2-3-3. Test mode........................................................................................................... 2-37 (1) Self print mode .......................................................................................... 2-37 (2) Hex dump mode ........................................................................................ 2-38 (3) Menu list print mode .................................................................................. 2-39 2-3-4. Factory/Service mode ........................................................................................ 2-40 (1) How to enter Factory/Service Mode ............................................................. 2-40 (2) How to print the Factory Mode Settings menus ............................................ 2-42 (3) How to change the settings in Factory mode ............................................ 2-45 (3-1) Submenu table in Factory mode................................................... 2-45 (3-2) Setting submenu in Factory mode ................................................ 2-48 (4) How to operate submenus in Service mode.............................................. 2-49 (4-1) Submenu table in Service mode ....................................................... 2-49 (4-2) Submenu operation in Service mode ................................................ 2-50 2-4. Interface.......................................................................................................................... 2-52 2-4-1. Serial Interface ................................................................................................... 2-52 (1) Specifications............................................................................................. 2-52 (2) Signal line and pin assignment.................................................................. 2-52 (3) Protocol ..................................................................................................... 2-53 2-4-2. Parallel Interface ................................................................................................ 2-54 (1) Specifications............................................................................................. 2-54 (2) Signal line and pin assignment.................................................................. 2-54 (3) Parallel port status signals when an error occurs ...................................... 2-55 (4) Compatible timing specification ................................................................. 2-55 2-4-3. USB Interface ..................................................................................................... 2-57 (1) Specifications............................................................................................. 2-57 (2) Signal line and pin arrangement................................................................ 2-57 2-3 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism 2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism This printer is a thermal transfer barcode & label printer comprised of the following mechanisms: media feed, label/tag detection, cover open detection, print head up/down detection, head balance adjustment, media thickness adjustment, and others. This section describes the operation of each of these mechanisms. 2-1-1. Locations of Main Electrical Parts (1) CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R (Printer Part) The following figure shows the locations of main electrical parts. Unit, Power Supply Ribbon Encoder (Ribbon Running Sensor/ Ribbon End Sensor) SA, Fan SA, Head Up SW Unit, Head Unit, Centro PCB SA, Cover Open Sens SA, Ope-pane PCB SA, Main PCB Transparent Sensor Reflective Sensor Unit, Motor Adjustable Sensor SA, Connect PCB Transparent Sensor Reflective Sensor Part name Unit, Motor SA, Head Up SW (Head Up Sensor) Adjustable Sensor CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Front Fixed Sensor Description This motor feeds media. A thermistor is attached to this motor to detect the motor temperature. This sensor is a mechanical switch to detect the print head position; up or down. Consists of the transparent sensor and the reflective sensor that move to right and left simultaneously by turning the adjust sensor position knob. Together with the reflective sensor, it is used to detect a label stuck on liner or a U-shaped notch on tag. The reflective sensor alone is used to detect the black marks on tag. The media end is detected with these sensors. 2-4 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism Part name Front Fixed Sensor SA, Cover Open Sens (Top Cover Open Sensor) Ribbon Encoder (Ribbon Running Sensor/Ribbon End Sensor) Unit, Head SA, Ope-pane PCB SA, Main PCB Unit, Centro PCB Unit, Power Supply SA, Connect PCB SA, Fan Description Consists of the transparent sensor and the reflective sensor. The function is the same as for adjustable sensor except that this sensor is fixed and does not move. This sensor is a photo interrupter to detect the top cover open status. This sensor is a photo interrupter to detect the ribbon running. It also detects the ribbon end. (It is a part of the “Unit, Frame Ribbon L”) This is a thermal head consisting of a head driver and thermal elements. It incorporates a thermistor to detect the thermal head temperature. Consists of LCD, LED and switches for operation. Controls enter printer system. This PCB is a connector board of the parallel interface. Converts AC to DC and feeds DC power to the circuits. This PCB will be used for optional cutter unit and optional peeler unit. Cooling fan that rotates during printing. 2-5 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism (2) CL-S700R (Rewinder Part) The following figure shows the locations of main electrical parts for CL-S700R (Rewinder part). SA, Peeler Sensor SA, Rewinder Motor SA, Rewinder PCB SA, Interlock SWPart name SA, Peel Sensor SA, Rewinder Motor SA, Interlock SW (Rewinder Cover Open Sensor) SA, Rewinder PCB CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Description This sensor is a photo reflector to detect the presence of peeled label at the exit of the printer. Rewinds the liner of the printed media. It consists of the rewinder motor, motor control PCB and thermistor that detects the motor temperature. This is a mechanical switch to detect the open/close status of the rewinder cover. Controls the rewinder operation. 2-6 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism 2-1-2. Media Feed Mechanism The major components of the media feed mechanism are: (a) Unit, Motor (d) Motor Drive Belt (b) SA1, Drive Shaft (e) Platen Drive Belt (c) Unit, Roller Platen (f) Tension Plate block By setting the head block to the down position, the “Unit, Head” pushes media against the platen. As the “Unit, Motor” (stepping motor) (located on the left) turns counterclockwise viewing from the right side of the printer, the platen turns counterclockwise via the “Belt, Motor Drive” (on the left side), “SA 1, Drive Shaft” (that links left and right side) and “Belt, Platen Drive” (on the right side). Then, media is fed forward by the friction force produced between the platen and the “Unit, Head”. Since the spring pulls the bottom of the Tension Plate block as shown in the figure, the Tension Plate block gives an adequate tension to the “Belt, Platen Drive”. When the “Unit, Motor” turns clockwise viewing from the right side of the printer, media is fed reversely. One step of the “Unit, Motor” feeds media by 1/16 mm (0.0025"). (Take-up Reel) (Supply Reel) Ribbon Thermal Element Unit, Head 4 Tension Plate Block Platen (Unit, Roller Platen) 3 2 Belt, Platen Drive (Right side) SA1, Drive Shaft 1 Belt, Motor Drive (Left side) Unit, Motor (Left side) 2-7 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism 2-1-3. Label/Tag Position Detection Mechanism The major components of the label/tag position detection mechanism are: (a) Adjustable Sensor (consisting of transparent sensor and reflective sensor) (b) Front Fixed Sensor (consisting of transparent sensor and reflective sensor) By default, the Sensor Select menu is set to “Rear Adj Sensor”, and the adjustable sensor is selected. The Adjustable Sensor consists of the reflective sensor (bottom sensor) and the transparent sensor (upper sensor) as shown blow. The reflective sensor consists of 1 LED and 1 phototransistor, while the transparent sensor consists of 1 LED (in practice, LED is not a sensor but it acts as a sensor by the combination of the reflective sensor’s phototransistor). The following table shows how the sensors detect a label, U-shaped notch or black mark. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-8 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism Detecting labels: (Media Sensor menu: “See Through”) For detecting label on the liner, both reflective sensor and transparent sensor are used. Label paper passes through between both sensors. The light emitted from the LED of the transparent sensor passes through the media and reaches the phototransistor of the reflective sensor. In liner part and label part, the amount of light that can pass through differs. Thus, the current flowing into the phototransistor differs, and the output of the phototransistor also differs. From the difference in outputs, the CPU on the Main PCB can detect the leading edge of label. Detecting U-shaped notches of tag: (Media Sensor menu: “See Through”) For detecting U-shaped notches of tag, the same principle as for detecting label applies, except that the light is directly falls on the phototransistor through the notch. Detecting black marks on tag: (Media Sensor menu: “Reflect”) For detecting black marks on tag, only the reflective sensor is used. Light emitted from the LED is reflected by the tag (at other than the black mark) and reaches the phototransistor of the reflective sensor. At the black mark, the light is not reflected. The CPU on the Main PCB detects the black mark by sensing the output of the phototransistor. Detecting continuous media: (Media Sensor menu: “None”) For detecting continuous media, only the reflective sensor is used. In this case, only media end is detected by the reflective sensor. Detecting media end: For any media, media end is detected with the sensor. 2-1-4. Top Cover Open Detection Mechanism The component of the top cover detection mechanism is as follows: (a) SA, Cover Open Sens The top cover open detection mechanism detects the open/close status of the top cover. When the top cover is closed, the claw of top cover engages with the “SA, Cover Open Sens” (photo interrupter). While it is opened, it comes off the “SA, Cover Open Sens”. The CPU on the Main PCB detects open/close status of the top cover by sensing the output from the “SA, Cover Open Sens”. When the top cover is opened, the ERROR LED blinks and the LCD displays “Error Cover Open” on the operation panel. Top Cover Claw SA, Cover Open Sens (Photo interrupter) 2-9 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism 2-1-5. Print Head Up/Down Detection Mechanism The component of the print head up/down detection mechanism is as follows: (a) SA, Head Up SW The print head up/down detection mechanism detects the up (open)/down (close) status of the head block. When the head block is in the up position, the switch lever of the “SA, Head Up SW” is released and the switch turns OFF. While, the head block is in the down position, it is pushed by the head block and the switch turns ON. The CPU on the Main PCB detects up or down position of the head block by sensing the switch output of the “SA, Head Up SW”. When the head block is in the up position, the ERROR LED blinks and the LCD displays “ERROR HEAD OPEN” on the operation panel. [Rear View] Head Block Switch OFF SA, Head Up SW Switch ON CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-10 Head Block Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism 2-1-6. Head Balance Adjustment Mechanism The major components of the head balance adjustment mechanism are: (a) Adjust Screw (Media width adjustment knob) (b) Slider (c) Head Spring L/R The head balance adjustment mechanism is used to eliminate uneven printing density on the left and right sides of media. The head balance adjustment is accomplished by changing the right side head pressure according to media width to be used. To change it, the Adjust Screw (Media width adjustment knob) is used. When narrow media is used (needs to give weak pressure on the right side): As you can see from the figure, the Head Spring L pushes the left side “Unit, Head” against the platen, at a constant pressure. While the Head Spring R pushes the right side “Unit, Head” against the Platen SA via the Slider. Since the Slider has taper shape on its bottom, the pressure that is developed by the Head Spring R varies with the Slider position. As the Slider moves toward the left (or the Adjust Screw is turned counterclockwise), the Head Spring R gives a weaker pressure to the “Unit, Head”. While, it moves to the right, a stronger pressure is given. For example, when narrow media is set, since no media exists on the right side, the right side pressure of the “Unit, Head” must be weak. Otherwise, the “Unit, Head” will slant toward the right and pressure is not appropriately given to narrow media, resulting in uneven printing density. To obtain optimum printing result, you need to move the Slider to the left by turning the Adjust Screw, while viewing the indicator in the media width check window. [For narrow media] Media width check window 25 (mm) 50 75 Slider 100 Head Spring L Adjust Screw Head Unit Media Platen Constant pressure Head Spring R Pressure: Low [For wide media] Pressure: High 2-11 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism When wide media is used (need to give strong pressure on the right side): The same principle applies to wide media. However, in this case, since the media is wide, the Slider should be moved toward the right (or the Adjust Screw should be turned clockwise) to get stronger pressure by the Head Spring R. 2-1-7. Media Thickness Adjustment Mechanism The major components of the media thickness adjustment mechanism are: (a) Media thickness adjustment screw (c) Offset Spring (b) Head Plate According to the change in media thickness, the thermal element position of the “Unit, Head” changes slightly. The media thickness adjustment mechanism is used to correct this change by moving the thermal element position back and forth a little, by turning the media thickness adjustment screw. With this adjustment, optimum printing quality is obtained. For thin media (standard label, thermal media, etc.): For thin media, normally, the media thickness adjustment screw will be turned counterclockwise 2 to 4 turns from the center line of the media thickness check window. As shown in the figure, when the media thickness adjustment screw is turned counterclockwise from the center position, the right end of the Head Plate is pushed up by the Offset Spring and the thermal element parts slightly moves to the right. [For standard label/thermal media] Media Thickness Adjustment Screw Head Plate Offset Spring Head Unit (Thermal elements) Media Thickness Check Window Platen [For thick media (tag)] Media Thickness Adjustment Screw Head Unit (Thermal elements) Media Thickness Check Window Platen CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-12 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism For thick media (tag paper): For thick media, normally, the media thickness adjustment screw will be turned further clockwise 2 to 4 turns from the center line of the media thickness check window. When the media thickness adjustment screw is turned clockwise further from the center position, the right end of the Head Plate is lowered and the thermal element parts slightly moves to the left. Shipping position: It is the position where the screw is turned by 2 turns counterclockwise from the center line (head offset “0”) of the media thickness check window. 2-1-8. Rewinder Cover Open Detection Mechanism (CL-S700R only) The component of the rewinder cover detection mechanism is as follows: (a) SA, Interlock SW (Rewinder Cover Open Sensor) The rewinder cover open detection mechanism detects the open/close status of the rewinder cover. When the rewinder cover is closed, the lever of the interlock switch is pushed by the plate “A” and it turns ON. While the rewinder cover is opened, the plate “A” comes off the interlock switch and the switch turns OFF. The CPU on the Main PCB detects open/close status of the rewinder cover by sensing the output from the “SA, Interlock SW”. When the rewinder cover is opened, the ERROR LED blinks and the LCD displays “Error Rewinder Open” on the operation panel. (Rewinder Cover) SA, Interlock SW ON OFF SA, Interlock SW 2-13 A CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism 2-1-9. Rewinding Mechanism (CL-S700R only) The components of the rewinding mechanism are as follows: (a) SA, Rewinder Motor (c) Measure Flap Plate (b) SA, Rewinder Flange (e) SA, Rewinder PCB As the rewinder motor turns, the “SA, Rewinder Flange” turns to wind up the liner. The Measure Flap Plate is pushed by the wound liner and turns backward and passes the form sensor (photo interrupters PS501/PS502) on the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. The amount of liner wound up at the flange is divided into four stages as follows (refer to the figure): 1st stage: PS501: ON, PS502: OFF 2nd stage: PS501: ON, PS502: ON 3rd stage: PS501: OFF, PS502: ON 4th stage (Full): PS501: OFF, PS502: OFF The rewinder motor speed to wind up the liner is changed in 1st to 3rd stages (fast to slow). When the Full state is detected, the CPU stops rewinder motor. In this state, the ERROR LED blinks and the LCD displays “Error Rewinder Full” on the operation panel. When printing is performed, the rewinder motor starts to turn to wind up the liner. Turning of the motor is detected by photo interrupter of the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. While the motor is turning, the blade at the end of motor turns and the intermittent pulse is output to the CPU from the photo interrupter. When the flange tightly wound up the liner, the motor stops as it cannot run further. In this state, since no pulse is output from the photo interrupter, the CPU judges that the liner has wound up and stops the motor. Above winding cycle is repeated for the next printing. SA, Rewinder Flange [Viewed from the left of the Rewinder Part] Plate, Measure Flap SA, Rewinder Flange Liner SA, Rewinder PCB PS502 PS501 (Blade) (Photo Interrupter) SA, Rewinder Motor Error: Rewinder Full CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-14 Liner Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts 2-2. Operation of Control Parts 2-2-1. Configuration of Printer The following shows major configuration blocks. (CL-S700/CL-S703) (CL-S700R) Rewinder Unit (Option) Auto Cutter Unit Cutter Motor SA, Rewinder Motor Cutter Position Sensor Cutter Motor Temp. Sensor Cutter PCB Rewinder Motor Temp. Sensor A/D Encode Sensor Rewinder Motor (DC) Rewinder PCB (Option) Peeler Unit Peel Sensor A/D RF-ID R/W (Serial Data) RS232C Driver/Receiver CPU Head Up Sensor UPD703111AGM-13-UEU-A Adjustable Sensor Peel Sensor Fan A/D A/D PF Motor Temp. Sensor A/D RS232C USB 1.1 128MHz A/D Thermal Head Temp. Sensor D/A Converter - PF motor current - PE sensor LED - Rewind motor current BZ Control / C.G. F-ROM(32Mbit) Cover Open Sensor SA, Ope-pane PCB (SW & LED) Peeler Unit Main PCB Ribbon Encoder Front Fixed Sensor A/D Form Sensor Connect PCB Rewinder Cover Open Sensor S-DRAM (128Mbits) Custom IC (Gate Array) UPD65946GJ-165-3EB-A PF Motor Driver SLA7033M PF Motor LCD (Serial Data) IEEE1284 Transceiver Thermal Print Head LAN I/F (Option) AC Inlet & Power Switch/ Filter & Power Supply Ethernet I/F Wireless LAN IEEE1284 2-15 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts Major functions of individual components are described below: (1) AC Inlet & Power Switch/Filter & Power Supply section Consists of a fuse, a filter circuit to eliminate external electric noise, and a switching type regulator to transform an AC input to +5V DC and +24V DC outputs required to drive the printer. (2) Main PCB Controls the entire operations of the printer. It consists of CPU, Flash ROM, S-DRAM, Custom IC (Gate Array), driver circuits, etc. (a) CPU The CPU is a microprocessor with 32-bit architecture. The clock fed to the CPU is 16 MHz. The CPU internally multiplies this 16 MHz by 8 times and uses 128 MHz clock. The CPU includes cache memory, RAMs, DMA controller, serial I/F, USB function controller, A/D converter, etc. (b) Flash ROM This is a flash ROM of 32M bits (4M bytes) that stores the firmware and CG (character generator). (c) S-DRAM (Synchronous dynamic RAM) This is an S-DRAM of 128M bits (16M bytes) that is used as working area, input buffer and download buffer. (d) Custom IC (Gate Array) The custom IC incorporates a control circuit for the interface I/O port, motor, print head, etc. (e) PF motor driver This is a circuit to drive the PF Motor. The PF Motor is a stepping motor. (f) Buzzer The buzzer is driven when an alarm, etc. occurs. (g) Fan This is a cooling fan at the left rear of the printer. Rotation of the fan is controlled by the CPU and the fan rotates during printing. The CPU monitors fan lock signal to check for any fan abnormality. If the fan stops during printing, ERROR LED blinks and “Error Fan Lock” is displayed on the operational panel. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-16 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts (3) Operation panel This is a panel used to indicate the operating status of the printer and to set specifications. It consists of 4 keys, 6 LEDs and 1 LCD. (4) Thermal print head The thermal print head has the following thermal elements. It also has the print head driver circuit. • 864 dots (CL-S700/CL-S700R) • 1275 dots (CL-S703) (5) Sensors CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R (Printer Part): The following 9 sensors are used: Sensor name Description Top Cover Open Sensor It is a photo interrupter to detect top cover open. (“SA, Cover Open Sens”) Head Up Sensor It is a mechanical switch (“SA, Head Up SW”) to detect head open/close status. Adjustable Sensor and Front Fixed Each transparent sensor: Sensor Consists of 1 LED. (Consists of the transparent sensor Each reflective sensor: and reflective sensor.) Consists of 1 LED and 1 phototransistor. Thermal Head Temp. Sensor PF Motor Temp. Sensor Ribbon Encoder (Ribbon Running Sensor/Ribbon End Sensor) CL-S700R (Rewinder Part): The following 5 sensors are used: Sensor name Peel Sensor Rewinder Cover Open Sensor Form Sensor Encode Sensor Rewinder Motor Temp. Sensor A thermistor incorporated in the print head. A thermistor attached to the PF Motor. A photo interrupter to detect ribbon running. It also detects the ribbon end. (A part of the “Unit, Frame Ribbon L”.) Description It is a photo reflector to detect the presence of peeled label at the exit of the printer. It is a mechanical switch to detect rewinder cover open/close status. (SA, Interlock SW) Two photo interrupters that are used to detect the amount of liner wounded by the flange. Full state is also detected. (PS501 and PS502 on the “SA, Rewinder PCB”.) A photo interrupter to detect the running of rewinder motor. (A part of the “SA, Rewinder Motor”) A thermistor attached to the rewinder motor. (A part of the “SA, Rewinder Motor”) (6) Motors 2-17 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts PF motor is used. It is a stepping motor to feed media. Ribbon will be fed with the media through developed friction force. Rewinder motor is used (CL-S700R only). It is a DC motor to turn the rewinder flange for winding up liner. (7) Parallel I/F (IEEE1284) This is a parallel I/F to transmit and receive parallel data between the printer and a host. It supports Centronics Compatible mode, NIBBLE mode and ECP mode. Parallel I/F, serial I/F, or USB I/F is automatically selected when data is received. (8) Serial I/F (RS-232C) This is a circuit to transmit and receive serial data between the printer and the host. Parallel I/F, serial I/F, or USB I/F is automatically selected when data is received. (9) USB (Universal Serial Bus) I/F This is a circuit to transmit and receive serial data between the printer and the host using the USB. Parallel I/F, serial I/F, or USB I/F is automatically selected when data is received. (10) Ethernet I/F (Option) This is a circuit which supports Ethernet protocol. LAN connection is possible. (11) Wireless LAN I/F (Option) This is a circuit which supports Ethernet protocol. Wireless LAN connection is possible. (12) Connect PCB This is a relay PCB to connect optional peeler unit and auto cutter unit. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-18 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts 2-2-2. Memory Map 0000000H 001FFFFH Command RAM (Built-in CPU) CPU 0100000H 0103FFFH 0104000H 0105FFFH 0106000H 0107FFFH 0108000H 010FFFFH 0110000H 027FFFFH 0280000H 03BFFFFH 03C0000H Boot Loader (1) Setting Information (User Settings) Setting Information (Factory-set Settings) Boot Loader (2) Flash ROM 4M bytes Firmware (Datamax) Firmware (Zebra) Downloading Area (1M bytes) 04BFFFFH 04E0000H 04EFFFFH 04F0000H 04FFFFFH Service Information (Backup) Service Information 0800000H Firmware (about 400K bytes) Receiving Buffer (16K bytes x 3)* Command Buffer (128K bytes) Others 0FFFFFFH SDRAM 16M bytes *: 16K bytes for each I/F (USB, IEEE1284 and Serial) 4000000H 40FFFFFH I/O Custom IC FFFB000H FFFEFFFH FFFF000H FFFFFFFH Data RAM (Built-in CPU) CPU I/O (Built-in CPU) 2-19 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts 2-2-3. Sensors (1) Top cover open sensor The top cover open sensor is used to detect the open/close status of the top cover. This sensor uses a photo interrupter. +5V +3.3V U1 CPU P75 CV_OPN R191 173 1 22 1 R406 R190 C113 J403 J401 J14 2 19 4 3 22 1 4 [Main PCB] Cover Open Sensor [Ope-pane PCB] When the top cover is closed, the claw of the top cover is engaged with the photo interrupter (top cover open sensor). In this case, light emitted from the LED of the photo interrupter is blocked by the claw and the phototransistor turns OFF. As a result, pin 173 (CV_OPN) of U1 (CPU) goes "High". When the top cover is opened, the claw is released from the photo interrupter and pin 173 (CV_OPN) of U1 (CPU) goes "Low". When the top cover is opened, the ERROR LED blinks and the LCD displays “ERROR COVER OPEN” on the operation panel. Top Cover Claw SA, Cover Open Sens (Photo interrupter) CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-20 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts (2) Head up sensor The head up sensor (“SA, Head Up SW”) is used to detect the head position (up or down). This sensor uses a mechanical micro switch. When the head block is closed (in the down position), the head block pushes the micro switch lever and the micro switch turns ON. In this state, pin 174 (HDUSENS) of U1 (CPU) goes "Low". When the head block is opened (in the up position), the micro switch turns OFF and pin 174 (HDUSENS) of U1 (CPU) goes "High". When the head block is opened, the ERROR LED blinks and the LCD displays “ERROR HEAD OPEN” on the operation panel. '( '( ! $!% &$ "# [Rear View] Head Block Switch OFF SA, Head Up SW Head Block Switch ON 2-21 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts (3) Adjustable Sensor The adjustable sensor consists of the transparent sensor (upper sensor) and the reflective sensor (lower sensor), and media passes between these sensors. The transparent sensor and reflective sensor are used to detect the label stuck on liner and the U-shaped notch on tag. While the reflective sensor alone is used to detect the black mark on the bottom surface of tag. Both sensors are also used to detect the media end. The transparent sensor consists of 1 LED (this is not a sensor actually but it acts as the transparent sensor by the combination of the phototransistor in the reflective sensor). The reflective sensor consists of 1 LED and 1 phototransistor. +5V U14 Custom IC PFCNT2 PFCNT1 OPRS +3.3V 100 R203 LEDMOVE_R DTA114EM J7 Q28 2SC5658 LEDMOVE_T Q9 DTA114EM Q27 99 [Transparent Sensor] Q8 R202 2SC5658 SA, Sensor U 1 UP LED A 2 UP LED K 77 R120 U1 CPU ANI1 U20B 6 SENSMOVE C83 + 7 5 - 6 BA2904 Media R122 DO NOT ADJUST! R124 DO NOT ADJUST! U4 BH2227 DACIN 12 DI AO1 1 2 PESENSLED DACCLK 11 AO2 CLK CS_DAC 10 R125 AO3 5 CSB C85 1 +3.3V VR4 VR3 P25 145 P23 147 J22 R207 Q21 Q20 5 6 DOWN TR C 4 DOWN TR E [Reflective Sensor] U5B + 3 SA, Sensor Bottom DTC114EM DTC114EM 2 DOWN LED A DOWN LED K 7 BA2904 R126 Q10 C86 R127 2SC5658 [Main PCB] Caution - DO NOT adjust VR3 and VR4 on the Main PCB. (Leave them at the factory setting condition.) If it is turned, media sensor sensitivity is changed and the media detection will not be correctly made. Transparent sensor (used for detecting the label or U-shaped notch): When transparent sensor is used together with the reflective sensor (media sensor menu: See Through), pin 99 (LEDMOVE_T) of U14 (Custom IC) goes “High”, Q28 and Q9 turn ON and the LED of the transparent sensor turns ON. The current flowing into the LED (the light amount to be emitted) for detecting label is determined by U4 (D/A converter), U5B and Q10 under the control of the U1 (CPU) and U14 (Custom IC). When the liner (without label stuck on it) passes between both transparent and reflective sensors, the light emitted from the LED of the transparent sensor reaches the phototransistor of reflective sensor, passing through the liner. Thus, the phototransistor conducts and the voltage corresponding to the amount of light received is applied to the analog input (pin 6 (SENSMOVE)) of U1 (CPU) via OP amp. U20B. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-22 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts The CPU senses this voltage and judges that the light is passing through media, namely, the liner part without label is now passing through the sensors. When the label part arrives at the sensors, the light is blocked by the label and does not reach the phototransistor. So, the phototransistor turns OFF and pin 6 (SENSMOVE) of U1 (CPU) goes from “High” to "Low". From this level change, the CPU can detect the leading edge (arrival) of the label on the liner. If media runs out, the light directly falls on the phototransistor and the phototransistor continuously turns ON. From this, media end is detected. The above principle applies when media with U-shaped notch is used. In this case, since the light directly falls the phototransistor, the current flowing into the LED (the amount of light emitted) is appropriately set for detecting the U-shaped notch. Reflective sensor (used for detecting the black mark on tag): The reflective sensor alone is used (media sensor menu: Reflect). In this case, pin 100 (LEDMOVE_R) goes “High”, Q27 and Q8 turn ON and the LED of the reflective sensor turns ON. The current flowing into the LED (the light amount to be emitted) for detecting black mark is determined by U4 (D/A converter), U5B and Q10 under the control of the U1 (CPU) and U14 (Custom IC). When tag with black marks is used, light emitted from the LED is reflected by the tag and reaches the phototransistor. At the place where no black mark exists, the phototransistor receives the reflected light and conducts. So, the voltage corresponding to the amount of light received is applied to the analog input (pin 6 (SENSMOVE)) of U1 (CPU) via U20B. When the light falls on the black mark, no light is reflected, the phototransistor turns OFF, and pin 6 of U1 (CPU) goes “Low”. When media runs out, the light is not reflected by media any more and the phototransistor continuously turns OFF. From this, media end is detected. 2-23 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts (4) Front Fixed Sensor The principle of the front fixed sensor is the same as that of the adjustable sensor. To use the front fixed sensor, you need to change the Sensor Select menu from “Rear Adj sensor” to “Front Fixed Sen”. +5V U14 Custom IC LED1 LED2 OPRS +3.3V 94 R201 LEDFIX_R DTA114EM J6 Q26 2SC5658 LEDFIX_T Q7 DTA114EM Q25 93 [Transparent Sensor] Q6 R200 2SC5658 SA, Sensor U 1 UP LED A 2 UP LED K 77 R117 U1 CPU ANI0 U20A 5 SENSFIX + 1 C81 3 - 2 BA2904 Media R118 DO NOT ADJUST! R121 DO NOT ADJUST! U4 BH2227 DACIN 12 DI AO1 1 2 PESENSLED DACCLK 11 AO2 CLK CS_DAC 10 R125 AO3 5 CSB C85 1 +3.3V VR2 VR1 P25 145 P23 147 J21 R206 Q19 Q18 5 6 DOWN TR C 4 DOWN TR E [Reflective Sensor] U5B + 3 SA, Sensor Bottom DTC114EM DTC114EM 2 DOWN LED A DOWN LED K 7 BA2904 R126 Q10 C86 R127 2SC5658 [Main PCB] Caution - DO NOT adjust VR1 and VR2 on the Main PCB. (Leave them at the factory setting condition.) If it is turned, media sensor sensitivity is changed and the media detection will not be correctly made. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-24 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts (5) Head temperature sensor The head temperature sensor is used to detect the temperature of the thermal head (“Unit, Head”). This sensor is a thermistor incorporated in the thermal head. Since the resistance of the thermistor changes according to the temperature change, the voltage at pin 7 (HDTMP) of U1 (CPU) changes accordingly. The CPU senses the voltage at pin 7 to detect the head temperature. According to the temperature of the thermal head, the CPU controls the width of printing pulse that is used to heat the thermal elements, to keep the printing density constant. +3.3V J3 U1 CPU ANI2 Thermal Head 19 7 HDTMP HDTMP C64 20 Thermal Head Temp. Sensor (Thermistor) R102 5-8, 21-25 [Main PCB] Printing operation when the head temperature rises abnormally: When the head temperature rises to 70°C (158°F), printing stops after printing the current label. In this case, the ERROR LED blinks and the LCD displays "Alarm Head Hot" on the operation panel. When the head temperature falls below 60°C (140°F), the ERROR LED stops blinking, the LCD returns to the original display “On Line”, and printing resumes. Printing Printing Printing 60°C (140°F) (Stop) (Stops) 70°C (158°F) Printing operation when the head temperature is too lower: When the head temperature is lower than -10°C (14°F), printing is inhibited, and the ERROR LED blinks and the LCD displays "Error Head Cold" on the operation panel. Printing is not possible until the temperature of the thermal head gets warm. 2-25 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts (6) PF motor temperature sensor The PF motor temperature sensor is used to detect the temperature of the PF Motor. This sensor is a thermistor bonded to the PF Motor. Since the resistance of the thermistor changes according to the temperature change, the voltage at pin 8 (MOTTMP) of U1 (CPU) changes accordingly. The CPU senses the voltage at pin 8 to detect the PF motor temperature. VREF U1 CPU C78 R112 R111 R113 U19A 1 TMPOFF (To PF Motor Driver) M PF Motor 2 MOTTMP VREF VREF J5 1 8 ANI3 PF Motor Temp. Sensor (Thermistor) R110 [Main PCB] R114 + 3 - 2 R115 uPC393GR-9LG R116 Printing operation when the PF motor temperature rises: When the temperature of the PF motor rises to 95°C (203°F), printing speed is reduced to avoid overheating. If it reaches 105°C (221°F), the PF motor stops after printing the current label. In this case, the ERROR LED blinks and the LCD displays "Alarm PFMotor Hot" on the operation panel. When the temperature of the PF motor falls below 90°C (194°F), the LED stops blinking, the LCD returns to the original display “On Line”, and printing resumes. Normal speed Normal speed 90°C (194°F) Normal speed (Stop) 95°C (203°F) Low speed (Stop) (Stops) 105°C (221°F) In addition to the PF motor temperature rise detection by the CPU, the circuitry composed of U19A OP amp. detects the high temperature over 130°C (266°F) to protect the PF motor. If the PF motor temperature exceeds 130°C (266°F), the output of U19A is reversed and TEMPOFF signal goes “Low”. As a result, +24V supply to the PF motor driver circuit is shut off. (For a detailed description, refer to 2-2-4 “(1) PF motor driver(1) PF motor driver(1) PF motor driver”.) When the PF motor temperature falls below 125°C (257°F), the output of U19A returns from “Low” to “High” so that +24V supply to the PF motor driver circuit resumes. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-26 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts (7) Ribbon encoder The ribbon encoder is a photo interrupter to detect ribbon running and ribbon end, and is incorporated in the ribbon unit (“Unit, Frame Ribbon L”). A bladed wheel is mounted on the supply reel of the ribbon unit. When the supply reel turns, the blades intermittently block the light emitted from the LED of the ribbon encoder. Thus, while the ribbon is running (supply reel is rotating), a pulse train is input to pin 76 (RIBENC) of U1 (CPU). With this pulse input, the CPU can detect tape running and tape end. Ribbon Unit +3.3V J8 1 Ribbon Encoder (Ribbon Running/ Ribbon End Sensor) 2 R130 U1 CPU A0 76 3 R128 RIBENC C87 4 R129 [Main PCB] 2-27 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts (8) Rewinder cover open sensor (CL-S700R only) The rewinder cover open sensor is used to detect the open/close status of the rewinder cover. This sensor uses a mechanical switch. +3.3V U1 CPU P73 R164 OPN R166 175 2 2 5 5 J504 +RW J502 J16 R513 J702 J701 1 1 1 2 2 2 Rewinder Cover Open Sensor (SA, Interlock SW) C100 [SA, Rewinder Motor] Q507 DTC114EM [Main PCB] [Rewinder PCB] When the rewinder cover is closed, the lever of the “SA, Interlock SW” (rewinder cover open sensor) is pressed by “A” and the switch turns ON. As a result, pin 175 (OPN) of U1 (CPU) goes "Low". When the rewinder cover is opened, the switch turns OFF and pin 175 (OPN) of U1 (CPU) goes "High". When the rewinder cover is opened, the ERROR LED blinks and the LCD displays “Error Rewinder Open” on the operation panel. (Rewinder Cover) SA, Interlock SW ON OFF SA, Interlock SW CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-28 A Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts (9) Rewinder motor temperature sensor (CL-S700R only) The Rewinder motor temperature sensor is used to detect the temperature of the rewinder motor. This sensor is a thermistor bonded to the rewinder motor. Since the resistance of the thermistor changes according to the temperature change, the voltage at pin 11 (MTTH) of U1 (CPU) changes accordingly. The CPU senses the voltage at pin 11 to detect the rewinder motor temperature. +3.3V U1 CPU AN16 R155 J501 J504 J15 J701 MTTH R16 10 10 4 4 11 5 5 5 5 C98 [Main PCB] [Rewinder PCB] Rewinder Motor Temp. Sensor (Thermistor) M Rewinder Motor [SA, Rewinder Motor] Rewinding operation when the rewinder motor temperature rises: When the temperature of the rewinder motor rises to 110°C (230°F), printing/rewinding stops. In this case, the ERROR LED blinks and the LCD displays "Alarm Rewinder Hot" on the operation panel. When the temperature of the rewinder motor falls below 100°C (212°F), the LED stops blinking, the LCD returns to the original display “On Line”, and printing/rewinding resumes. Printing Printing 100°C (212°F) Printing (Stop) 2-29 (Stops) 110°C (230°F) CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts (10) Peel sensor (CL-S700R only) The peel sensor is used to detect the peeled label at the exit of the printer. This sensor is a reflective sensor. When a peeled label exists at the exit of the printer, the light emitted from the LED of the peel senor is reflected by the label and reaches the phototransistor. Thus, the voltage at pin 12 (PEELSENS) of U1 (CPU) becomes “High”. The CPU senses the voltage at pin 12 to detect the presence of label at the exit. When no label exists at the exit of the printer, the light emitted from the LED does not reach the phototransistor. Thus, the voltage at pin 12 (PEELSENS) of U1 (CPU) becomes “Low”. CRPTYP1 signal (pin 96 (PM1) of U14 (Custom IC)) is used to detect whether the “SA, Peel Sensor” is installed in the CL-S700R or not. Peeled label +5.0V +3.3V U14 Custom IC PM1 96 R16 CRPTYP1 J502 J16 J503 1 1 4 2 2 2 7 7 3 6 6 5 +3.3V U1 CPU AN17 PEELSENS R168 12 D9 SA, Peel Sensor R167 R169 [Main PCB] CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-30 [Rewinder PCB] [Peel Sensor] Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts 2-2-4. Drivers (1) PF motor driver This is a driving circuit to drive the PF Motor (stepping motor). The following illustration shows a simplified circuit. The PF Motor is driven by the unipolar constant current chopper method. The exciting method for the motor is the 2-phase method. The power to the PF Motor is supplied by turning ON the FET Q4. This is accomplished by activating the monostable multivibrator U16A. When U16A is triggered, Q5 turns ON and FET Q4 turns ON. (TEMPOFF signal is normally at “High”. If the PF motor temperature rises excessively, TEMPOFF signal goes “Low” and the output from U16A is inhibited. Thus, +24V to the PF Motor is shut off. For TEMPOFF signal, refer to 2-2-3 “(6) PF motor temperature sensor”.) PFMA, PFMA, PFMB and PFMB signals are the exciting pulses to drive the PF Motor. The digital-to-analog converter (U4) is used to control the PF motor current by applying its output to pins 3 and 14 (REFA and B) of the motor driver (U18). U16A Monostable Multivibrator From U1 CPU From U14 Custom IC From U1 CPU PFCLK PFON 1 2 GRESET 3 Low: Turns on Q4 to supply power to the PF motor. Q 13 A B R105 +24V R104 Q4 XP132A11A1 Q5 DTC114EM CLR PFMTCOM 74VHC123 From PF Motor Temp. Sensor Circuit TMPOFF 1 2 U18 Motor Driver 4 U17 From U14 Custom IC From U1 CPU From U14 Custom IC PFMA PFMA PFMB PFMB U4 BH2227 1 PFMOTCU R106 DACIN 12 AO1 DI DACCLK 11 AO2 2 CLK CS_DAC 10 AO3 5 CSB R107 2-31 7 12 6 5 17 16 VSA VSB INA INA INB INB J4 5 2 OUT A OUT A OUT B OUT B 8 1 C69 PF Motor 1 M 6 18 11 4 C70 3 3 REFA 14 REFB C71 SLA7033MPR [Main PCB] CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts (2) Head driver The head driver is incorporated in the “Unit, Head”. During printing, pin 116 (HDVON) of U14 (Custom IC) goes to "High", and Q2 and Q1 turn ON. Thus +24V is supplied to the thermal head (“Unit, Head”). The print data is sent from U14 (Custom IC) to the head driver in the thermal head. The signals HD1 to 4, HDSTB, HDCLK and HDLAT (pins 109 to 113, 108, 115 and 107 of U14) are sent to the thermal head. According to the print data (HD1 to 4), the selected thermal elements are heated and the melted ink makes dots on media (or dots are printed on thermal transfer paper). The width of heating pulse applied to a thermal element varies with the head temperature to keep the printing density constant. U14 Custom IC HDVON +3.3V R93 116 2SJ505S DTC114EM R97 C61 U1 CPU ANI4 VHEAD Thermal element abnormality check Q3 DTA114EM 117 HCVON R95 Q2 +3.3V HCVON R96 D1 VHEADMON 9 Q1 R94 HDVON Head power supply monitoring +24V Head supply voltage ON/OFF R99 R100 10 Q29 DTC114EM C62 D2 HEADRES ANI5 Thermal element abnormality check ON When driving: +24V When checking: +3.3V HDATA1-4 109-113 108 HDSTB 115 HDCLK 107 HDLTH HD1-4 HDSTB HDCLK HDLAT U15A 2,4,6,8 A1-4 11 A5 13 A6 16 A7 1,19 OE Y1-4 Y5 Y6 Y7 18,16, 14,12 J3 +5V HDTHM1 1-4,26-30 HEADD1-4 10,12,14,17 9 7 9,15 HEADSTB R101 HEADCLK 16 5 HEADLAT 18 11 5-8,21-25 74HCT244 [Main PCB] CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 13 2-32 Thermal Head Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts Thermal resistance check: When the printer is turned ON, the thermal resistance check is conducted. If any fault is found, the ERROR LED blinks and the LCD displays “Alarm Head Check” on the operation panel. During the thermal resistance check, pin 117 (HCVON) of U14 (Custom IC) goes to "High", and Q29 and Q3 turn ON. Thus, +3.3V is supplied to the thermal head, instead of +24V. The following is a simplified circuitry under checking, where Q3 turns ON and a thermal element "R" is selected. The voltage at point “A” becomes the value divided by R99 and R. The CPU monitors this voltage at pin 10 (HEADRES), and check if the voltage is in the allowable range or not. (If R is open, the voltage at point “A” will be about +3.3V.) Every thermal element is successively checked in this way. +3.3V Q3 A U1 CPU R99 R100 D2 R 10 ANI5 HEADRES Thermal head R: Resistance of a thermal element in the thermal head 2-33 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts (3) Rewinder motor driver (CL-S700R only) This is a driving circuit to drive the rewinder motor (DC motor). The following illustration shows a simplified circuit. Rewinder motor ON/OFF status is controlled by DCMTR1 and DCMTR0 signals sent from pins 35 and 40 of U1 (CPU). Motor ON: DCMTR1=L and DCMTR0=H Motor OFF (free): DCMTR1=L and DCMTR0=L Braking: DCMTR1=H (DCMTR0=L/H) When DCMTR1 signal is “Low”, Q502 turns OFF and Q501 turns OFF. When DCMTR0 signal is “High”, Q506 turns ON, Q505 turns OFF and, if Q503 is OFF (DCMTR1 signal is “Low”), Q504 turns ON and the rewinder motor is turned. +24.0V J15 1 2 2 DCMTR1 R157 7 7 DCMTR1 35 DCMTR0 R156 6 6 DCMTR0 U1 CPU PCS7 PCS4 +RW J501 1 +24.0V C507 R163 MTENC R165 J15 C99 J502 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 +5.0V MTREF +5.0V R512 R507 R509 +3.3V 176 Q501 2SJ668 Q503 DTC114EM +5.0V +5.0V R508 J16 [SA, Rewinder Motor] J701 J504 R505 C506 40 +5.0V D503 Q502 D502 DTC114EM D504 R506 MTREF (+RW Control) P72 R504 Q504 2SK4033 Q505 DTC114EM 1 2 3 3 5 5 7 7 6 6 Rewinder Motor M Blade PS701 Q506 DTC114EM +24.0V Switching Regulator U501 +RW ADJ MTENC +3.3V +3.3V U14 Custom IC R153 HPSENS0 R158 SW6 84 R159 SW5 85 HPSENS1 C96 J15 R154 J501 8 8 HPSENS0 9 9 HPSENS1 C97 +5.0V +5.0V R511 R510 PS502 PS501 [Rewinder PCB] [Main PCB] Rewinder Full detection: The form sensor (photo interrupters PS501 and PS502) on the “SA, Rewinder PCB” is used to detect the diameter of wound liner (or the amount of liner) at the flange in the following four stages. As the diameter increases, the Measure Flap Plate turns backward and engages with PS501 and PS502. 1st stage: PS501: ON, PS502: OFF 2nd stage: PS501: ON, PS502: ON 3rd stage: PS501: OFF, PS502: ON 4th stage (Full): PS501: OFF, PS502: OFF The 1st to 3rd stages are used to control the rewinder motor speed as mentioned on the next page. The 4th stage is the Full state. The outputs of PS501 and PS502 are fed to pins 84 (HPSENS0) and 85(HPSENS1) of U14 (Custom IC). When the Measure Flap Plate engages PS501/PS502, the light emitted from the LED is blocked by the plate and PS501/PS502 turns ON and pin 84/85 becomes “High”. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-34 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-2. Operation of Control Parts When Full state (PS501: OFF, PS502:OFF) is detected, rewinding operation stops, and the ERROR LED blinks and the LCD displays “Error Rewinder Full” on the operation panel. SA, Rewinder Flange Liner Plate, Measure Flap SA, Rewinder Flange Liner SA, Rewinder PCB PS502 PS501 (Blade) (Photo Interrupter) SA, Rewinder Motor Error: Rewinder Full Liner rewinding operation: The rewinder motor turns to wind up the liner. During motor running, the blade of the motor turns and the intermittent pulse is output from the photo interrupter PS701 of the “SA, Rewinder Motor” to pin 176 (MTENC) of U1 (CPU). The rewinder motor speed should vary according to the diameter of the wound liner to nearly keep the winding speed constant. The rewinder motor speed is controlled by checking the ON/OFF status of PS501 and PS502. That is, the rewinder motor speed is high for small diameter and it is low for large diameter. This is accomplished by the MTREF signal sent to U501 (Switching regulator) that produces +RW power supply for the rewinder motor. +RW can be changed by changing the level of the MTREF signal. (Higher +RW turns the rewinder motor faster.) 2-35 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel 2-3. Operation Panel Operation panel is located on the left/front side of the printer. Operation panel consists of 4 keys, 6 LEDs and 1 LCD. On Line Ready POWER ERROR On Line Ready Rewind POWER FEED FEED STOP PAUSE ERROR STOP PAUSE MENU MENU CL-S700/CL-S703 CL-S700R 2-3-1. External view (1) Keys There are 4 keys, [MENU], [PAUSE], [FEED] and [STOP]. The function name on the key is selected when the key is pressed. (2) LEDs There are 6 LEDs; POWER LED, ERROR LED and 4 LEDs for keys. The LEDs light up or blink to indicate printer status, setting modes, or error conditions. POWER LED: Lights up when power is turned on. (green) ERROR LED: Blinks when an error occurs. (orange) LEDs for keys: Light up when power is turned on to illuminate keys. (3) LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) The LCD is a 128 x 64 dots display using STN (Super-Twisted Nematic) display system. It displays printer statuses including alarm statuses, menus and its operation guide, etc. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-36 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel 2-3-2. Menu setup mode You can set the menu according to your requirements. To enter menu setup mode, press the [MENU] key while “On Line Ready” is displayed on the LCD. For details, refer to the User’s Manual. 2-3-3. Test mode The following Test modes are available: Operation Description [FEED] + “Power ON” Enters self print mode. [STOP] + “Power ON” Enters hex dump mode. [MENU] + “Power ON” Enters menu list printing mode. (1) Self print mode You can check the printing quality by printing the built-in self print pattern. This function is convenient to obtain optimum printing while adjusting the media thickness with the Media Thickness Adjustment screw and media width with the Media Width Adjustment knob. For label (prints 2 labels): 1. While pressing and holding the [FEED] key, turn on the power. 2. Wait until the POWER LED turns on and the LCD indicates “Self Print Mode” “Label Media”, and then release the [FEED] key. The printer enters self print mode and the label is fed. Self test printing is made for two labels, and then printing stops. 3. To repeat self test printing, press the [FEED] key again. To exit from self print mode: Turn off the power. [Print pattern in self print mode] For continuous media: 1. While pressing and holding the [FEED] key, turn on the power. 2. Wait until the POWER LED turns on and the LCD changes from “Self Print Mode” “Label Media” to “Cont. Media”, and then release the [FEED] key. The printer enters self print mode and the label is fed for self test printing. After printing it stops. 3. To repeat self test printing, press the [FEED] key again. To exit from self print mode: Turn off the power. Media feed direction 2-37 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel (2) Hex dump mode You can print the data in the receive buffer in the hexadecimal form. For label: 1. While pressing and holding the [STOP] key, turn on the power. 2. Wait until the POWER LED turns on and the LCD indicates “Hex Dump Mode” “Label Media”, and then release the [STOP] key. The printer enters hex dump mode and, when print data is sent to the printer, hex dump printing starts. To exit from hex dump mode: Turn off the power. For continuous media: 1. While pressing and holding the [STOP] key, turn on the power. 2. Wait until the POWER LED turns on and the LCD changes from “Hex Dump Mode” “Label Media” to “Cont. Media”, and then release the [STOP] key. The printer enters hex dump mode and, when print data is sent to the printer, hex dump printing starts. To exit from hex dump mode: Turn off the power. [Dump list example] DUMP LIST 02 40 30 31 30 30 0D 02 60 30 30 32 30 0D 02 4C .M0100..c0020..L 44 31 31 0D 31 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 31 30 D11.100000000010 30 30 31 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 0010123456789:;< CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-38 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel (3) Menu list print mode You can print the list of machine information and current menu settings. 1. While pressing and holding the [MENU] key, turn on the power. The POWER LED turns on and the LCD indicates “Print Settings”, and then automatically print starts. The printer prints the list of machine information and current menu settings, and then enters menu setup mode for further menu operation. To exit from menu list print mode: In Main menu, press the [PAUSE] (W) key. Machine Information Model Number Boot Version ROM Version ROM Date(DD//MM//YY) ROMCheck Sum Head Check Print Counter Service Counter Sensor Monitor Option Interface : CL-S700 : **** : ******** : XX/XX/XX : **** : OK : 0002.234 km : 0002.234 km : 1.50 V : None Current Menu Settings [Page Setup Menu] Print Speed Print Darkness Darkness Adjust Print Method Continuous Media Length Vertical Position Horizontal Shift Vertical Image Shift Sensor Select Media Sensor Small Media Adjustment Small Media Length Symbol Set : 7 IPS : 12 : 00 : Thermal Transfer : 4.00 inch : 0.00 inch : 0.00 inch : 0.00 inch : Rear Adj Sensor : See Through : Off : 1.00 inch : PM [System Setup Menu] Sensor Level Paper End Level Error Reporting Cover Open Sensor Buzzer Select Metric/Inch Max Media Length Setting Lock Keyboard Lock Control Code Emulation Select : 1.7 V : 2.80 V : On Printing : Off : On : Inch : 10.00 inch : Off Off : STD : DM4 [After Print Menu] AutoConfigure Function Select Cutter Action Paper Position Menu Key Action : On : Tear : Backfeed : 0.00 inch : Enters Menu [Interface Menu] RS-232C Baud rate RS-232C Parity RS-232C Length RS-232C Stop bit RS-232C X-ON IEEE 1284 USB Device Class USB VCOM Protocol : 9600 : None : 8 bit : 1 bit : Yes : On : Printer : Auto Note: Citizen continually enhances its printers with new options and settings based on our customer’s requests. Extra or changed menu items may appear on the print out in some cases. 2-39 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel 2-3-4. Factory/Service mode Factory mode and Service mode are available for maintenance work, Factory mode: You can change the factory-set items such as logical shift of the sensor or head. Service mode: You can perform checks such as head check and service counter value that shows the media length printed. In this section, the followings are explained. • How to enter Factory/Service Mode • How to print the Factory Mode Settings menus • How to change the settings in Factory mode • How to operate service menu in Service mode (1) How to enter Factory/Service Mode To enter Factory/Service mode, perform the following operation. • While pressing and holding the [MENU], [FEED] and [STOP] keys, turn on the printer. Then, the following is displayed on the LCD. S Main Menu T Factory Setup W Exit Enter X Key function in Factory/Service mode: [FEED] (S) Returns to previous item, or the value is incremented/changed. [MENU] (T) Goes to the next item, or the value is decremented/changed. [PAUSE] (W) Resets the printer, or exits from the current menu. [STOP] (X) Acts as the Enter key. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-40 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel The following diagram shows the menu transition in Factory/Service mode. While pressing the [MENU], [FEED] and [STOP] keys, turn on the printer. Submenu (Service mode) Main menu Factory Setup T S Service Mode T X W X W S Page Setup T S Submenu (Factory mode) Sens Vol Adj T Head Check T S S Init Fix-Thru T S ROM Check T S System Setup T S After Print T Parallel ErrOut Service Counter S USB Serial Num Interface T S Machine Info T S Test Mode T S Global Config To exit from Factory/Service mode: In Main menu, press the [PAUSE] (W) key. 2-41 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel (2) How to print the Factory Mode Settings menus You can print the current factory mode setting values in the following two ways. Method 1: While pressing and holding all keys ([MENU], [FEED], [STOP] and [PAUSE]), turn on the power. The current factory mode setting values are printed, and then the printer enters the Factory mode. To exit from the Factory mode: Press the [PAUSE] (W) key. Method 2 Enter the Factory/Service mode and print the configuration settings. 1) Enter the Factory/Service mode by turning on the power while pressing and holding the [MENU], [FEED] and [STOP] keys. (Refer to “(1) How to enter Factory/Service Mode” mentioned earlier.) 2) Press the [MENU] (T) or [FEED] (S) key until “Test Mode” main menu appears. 3) Press the [STOP] (X) key to enter the Test Mode. 4) Press the [MENU] (T) or [FEED] (S) key until “Print Pattern” submenu appears. 5) Press the [STOP] (X) key to enter the Print Pattern submenu. 6) Press the [MENU] (T) or [FEED] (S) key and select “Current Config”. 7) Press the [STOP] (X) key to print the configuration settings. The current factory mode setting values are printed. To exit from menu mode: Press the [PAUSE] (W) key until the printer exits from the “Test Mode” main menu. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-42 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel [Print sample] Machine Information Model Number Boot Version ROM Version ROM Date(DD//MM//YY) ROMCheck Sum Head Check Print Counter Service Counter Sensor Monitor Option Interface : CL-S700 : **** : ******** : XX/XX/XX : **** : OK : 0002.234 km : 0002.234 km : 1.50 V : None Factory Mode Settings Fix Through Sensor Pos. Fix Reflect Sensor Pos. Adj Through Sensor Pos. Adj Reflect Sensor Pos. Machine Tear Position Machine Cut Position Machine Peel Position Machine Horizontal Pos. AutoCal Mode Fix Through Sensor Fix Reflect Sensor Adj Through Sensor Adj Reflect Sensor Fix Through Cal Level Fix Reflect Cal Level Fix SensNone Cal Level Adj Through Cal Level Adj Reflect Cal Level Adj SensNone Cal Level Double Heat Menu PowerOn Head Check Head Check Start Pos. Head Check Stop Pos. Head Error Print Max Page Length Ribbon End Detection Void to TOF Reverse Media Length Paper End Sensor Parallel Error Output Auto Online Auto Online Delay Top Form Sensing USB Serial Number : 0 dot : 0 dot : 0 dot : 0 dot : 0 dot : 0 dot : 0 dot : 8 dot : On : 0.0 V : 0.0 V : 0.0 V : 0.0 V : 2.30 V : 2.10 V : 2.05 V : 2.30 V : 2.10 V : 2.05 V : Off : On : Dot 1 : Dot 848 : No : 32 inch : Normal : Off : 0.00 inch : On : On : Off : 2 sec : On : Off Submenus for maintenance only Current Menu Settings [Page Setup Menu] Print Speed Print Darkness Darkness Adjust Print Method Continuous Media Length Vertical Position Horizontal Shift Vertical Image Shift Sensor Select Media Sensor Small Media Adjustment Small Media Length Symbol Set : 7 IPS : 12 : 00 : Thermal Transfer : 4.00 inch : 0.00 inch : 0.00 inch : 0.00 inch : Rear Adj Sensor : See Through : Off : 1.00 inch : PM 2-43 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel [System Setup Menu] Sensor Level Paper End Level Error Reporting Cover Open Sensor Buzzer Select Metric/Inch Max Media Length Setting Lock Keyboard Lock Control Code Emulation Select : 1.7 V : 2.80 V : On Printing : Off : On : Inch : 10.00 inch : Off Off : STD : DM4 [After Print Menu] AutoConfigure Function Select Cutter Action Paper Position Menu Key Action : On : Tear : Backfeed : 0.00 inch : Enters Menu [Interface Menu] RS-232C Baud rate RS-232C Parity RS-232C Length RS-232C Stop bit RS-232C X-ON IEEE 1284 USB Device Class USB VCOM Protocol : 9600 : None : 8 bit : 1 bit : Yes : On : Printer : Auto Note: Citizen continually enhances its printers with new options and settings based on our customer’s requests. Extra or changed menu items may appear on the print out in some cases. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-44 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel (3) How to change the settings in Factory mode Caution - In Factory mode, DO NOT change the factory-set values unless you need to change them, since there are essential items related to printing accuracy, etc. - Do not turn OFF the power of the printer until you finish the adjustment. If it is turned OFF, you need to repeat the adjustment from the beginning. - The value adjusted here is retained until you change it with the same procedure. Even if you perform initialization by selecting “Test Mode” main menu, “Factory Default” submenu and “Yes”, the changed value is not returned to the initial value set at the factory. (3-1) Submenu table in Factory mode The following table shows the submenus of “Factory Setup” main menu. *1 “[Factory Mode Settings Menu name]” in “Submenu Name” column shows the name that will be printed in “Factory Mode Settings”. (Refer to “(2) How to print the Factory Mode Settings menus”.) *2 “+” shows that the object electrically moves forward/rightward. “-“ shows that the object electrically moves backward/leftward. 8 dots correspond to 1 mm (203 dots correspond to 1”). Submenu Name [Factory Mode Settings Menu name] Sens Vol Adj Adjustable Value (Default Value) Description Displays the level of each media sensor. Init Fix-Thru Performs calibration of the transparent sensor sensitivity (fixed type). For details, refer to “3-6-1 (2) Sensor sensitivity adjustment (Factory mode)” in Chapter 3. Performs calibration of the reflective sensor sensitivity (fixed type). For details, refer to “3-6-1 (2) Sensor sensitivity adjustment (Factory mode” in Chapter 3. Performs calibration of the transparent sensor sensitivity (adjustable type). For details, refer to “3-6-1 (2) Sensor sensitivity adjustment (Factory mode” in Chapter 3. Performs calibration of the reflective sensor sensitivity (adjustable type). For details, refer to “3-6-1 (2) Sensor sensitivity adjustment (Factory mode” in Chapter 3. Init Fix-Refl Init Adj-Thru Init Adj-Refl 2-45 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel Submenu Name [Factory Mode Settings Menu name] Fix-Thru Pos [Fix Through Sensor Pos.] -256 to +256 dot (+000 dot) Fix-Refl Pos [Fix Reflect Sensor Pos.] -256 to +256 dot (+000 dot) Adj-Thru Pos [Adj Through Sensor Pos.] -256 to +256 dot (+000 dot) Adj-Refl Pos [Adj Reflect Sensor Pos.] -256 to +256 dot (+000 dot) Mach Tear Pos [Machine Tear Position] Mach Cut Pos [Machine Cut Position] Mach Peel Pos [Machine Peel Position] Mach Hor Pos Machine Horizontal Pos.] -256 to +256 dot (+000 dot) -256 to +256dot (+000 dot) -256 to +256dot (+000 dot) -16 to +32dot (+008 dot) Auto Cal Mode [AutoCal Mode] Fix-Thru LED [Fix Through Sensor] On/Off (On) 0.0 to 3.3V (0.0 V) Fix-Refl LED [Fix Reflect Sensor] 0.0 to 3.3V (0.0 V) Adj-Thru LED [Adj Through Sensor] 0.0 to 3.3V (0.0 V) Adj-Refl LED [Adj Reflect Sensor] 0.0 to 3.3V (0.0 V) CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Adjustable Value (Default Value) 2-46 Description Electrically shifts the position of transparent sensor (fixed type) back and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”) Electrically shifts the position of reflective sensor (fixed type) back and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”) Electrically shifts the position of transparent sensor (adjustable type) back and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”) Electrically shifts the position of reflective sensor (adjustable type) back and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”) Electrically shifts the tear off position back and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”) Electrically shifts the cutting position back and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”) (Optional) Electrically shifts the peel position back and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”) (Optional) Electrically shifts the head position to the right or left side. (-2 to +4 mm, -0.08 to +0.16”) Automatically controls the light amount of each media sensor. This menu is effective when “Auto Cal Mode” is set to OFF. The light amount emitted from the transparent sensor (fixed type) can be changed manually. Larger value emits larger amount of light. This menu is effective when “Auto Cal Mode” is set to OFF. The light amount emitted from the LED of the reflective sensor (fixed type) can be changed manually. Larger value emits larger amount of light. This menu is effective when “Auto Cal Mode” is set to OFF. The light amount emitted from the transparent sensor (adjustable type) can be changed manually. Larger value emits larger amount of light. This menu is effective when “Auto Cal Mode” is set to OFF. The light amount emitted from the LED of the reflective sensor (adjustable type) can be changed manually. Larger value emits larger amount of light. Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel Submenu Name [Factory Mode Settings Menu name] Fix-Thru Level [Fix Through Cal Level] 0.01 to 3.30V (2.30 V) Fix-Refl Level [Fix Reflect Cal Level] 0.01 to 3.30V (2.10 V) Fix-None Level [Fix SensNone Cal Level] 0.01 to 3.30V (2.05 V) Adj-Thru Level [Adj Through Cal Level] 0.01 to 3.30V (2.30V) Adj-Refl Level [Adj Reflect Cal Level] 0.01 to 3.30V (2.10 V) Adj-None Level [Adj SensNone Cal Level] 0.01 to 3.30V (2.05 V) Peel Sens Level 0.01 to 3.30V (1.50 V) Through/Reflect (Reflect) On/Off (Off) On/Off (On) Dots 001 to 848 (Dot 001) Dots 001 to 848 (Dot 848) Normal/Slow (Normal) On/Off (On) On/Off (Off) Cont Paper Sens Dbl Heat Menu [Double Heat Menu] PwrOn Head Chk [Power On Head Check] Head Chk Start [Head Check Start Pos.] Head Chk Stop [Head Check Stop Pos.] Rbn End Detect [Ribbon End Detection] Parallel ErrOut USB Serial Num [USB Serial Number] Adjustable Value (Default Value) 2-47 Description Performs sensitivity adjustment of the front fixed sensor for Media Sensor menu “See Through”. The amount of light received is set to “2.30V”. Performs sensitivity adjustment of the front fixed sensor for Media Sensor menu “Reflect”. The amount of light received is set to “2.10V”. Performs sensitivity adjustment of the front fixed sensor for Media Sensor menu “None”. The amount of light received is set to “2.05V”. Performs sensitivity adjustment of the adjustable sensor for Media Sensor menu “See Through”. The amount of light received is set to “2.30V”. Performs sensitivity adjustment of the adjustable sensor for Media Sensor menu “Reflect”. The amount of light received is set to “2.10V”. Performs sensitivity adjustment of the adjustable sensor for Media Sensor menu “None”. The amount of light received is set to “2.05V”. Sets the threshold value for the peel sensor. When continuous media is used, selects the sensor type to be used for detecting paper end. Sets whether to display the menu of "Double Heat". Sets whether to perform head check at power ON or not. Designates the start dot for head check. Designates the end dot for head check. Sets the ribbon end detection time. Select whether to activate the Fault signal of parallel interface at the time of error occurrence. Select whether to send the serial number to the host when operating the printer through the USB interface. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel (3-2) Setting submenu in Factory mode In Factory mode, there are 2 types of submenus. • Value setting type • Option selection type Procedure: 1. Enter Factory/Service mode by turning on the power while pressing and holding the [MENU], [FEED] and [STOP] keys. “Factory Setup” main menu appears. 2. In “Factory Setup” main menu, press the [STOP] (X) key to enter Factory Setup mode. The first submenu “Sens Vol Adj.” appears. 3. Press the [MENU] (T) or [FEED] (S) key until “Adj-Thru Pos” submenu (example) appears. 4. Press the [STOP] (X) key to select that submenu. The current value is shown on the LCD. S W Position T +000 dots Exit Enter X 5. Press the [MENU] (T) or [FEED] (S) key to increase or decrease the value (or select a desired option). In this example, the position of transparent sensor (adjustable type) will be electrically moved back (-) and forth (+). 6. Press the [STOP] (X) key to save the set value in the printer. 7. Press the [PAUSE] (W) key to return to “Factory Setup” menu. (To set other submenu, repeat from Step 2.) 8. Press the [PAUSE] (W) key once again. The changed value is stored in the printer and the printer is turned OFF and then ON for normal operation. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-48 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel (4) How to operate submenus in Service mode (4-1) Submenu table in Service mode The following table shows the submenus of “Service Mode” main menu. Submenu Name Head Check ROM Check RAM Check Motor Feed Print Counter Service Counter Value Description Checks the number of defective thermal elements and displays it. If no defective thermal element is found, “0000” will be displayed. Example: PASS 0000dots Performs ROM checksum test, and displays the check result (OK or NG) and the checksum value. Example: PROGRM OK 4F4E. Performs RAM capacity check and displays the check result. Example: DRAM OK 16384KByte Performs motor feed check. Displays the total printed length since the printer is firstly used. Example: Length 1234.567Km Displays the service counter length in Km since you reset it last. Example: Length 0123.456Km To clear the service counter, press the [Enter] (X) key. 2-49 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel (4-2) Submenu operation in Service mode The submenu operation procedures in Service mode are explained here. The submenus other than “Service Counter” and the “Service Counter” submenu are separately explained. Operation procedure for submenus other than “Service Counter”: 1. Enter Factory/Service mode by turning on the power while pressing and holding the [MENU], [FEED] and [STOP] keys. “Factory Setup” main menu appears. 2. Press the [MENU] (T) or [FEED] (S) key until “Service Mode” main menu appears. 3. Press the [STOP] (X) key to enter Service mode. 4. Press the [MENU] (T) or [FEED] (S) key until the desired submenu (e.g. “Head Check”) appears. S Service Mode T Head Check W Exit Enter X 5. Press the [STOP] (X) key to select that submenu. * For submenus “ROM Check”, “RAM Check”, and “Print Counter”, the result is displayed and further operation is not necessary. * For submenu “Head Check”, the following screen appears and prompts you whether to perform the head check or not. * For submenu “Motor Feed”, the following screen appears and prompts you whether to feed media forward or backward. [When “Head Check” is selected] [When “Motor Feed” is selected] Check No S W Exit T S Enter X W Motor Feed T Back Exit Enter X 6. Press the [MENU] (T) or [FEED] (S) key and select “Yes” (when “Head Check” is selected) or “Forward”/”Back” (when “Motor Feed” is selected). 7. Press the [STOP] (X) key to perform the selected item. * When “Head Check” is selected, the number of defective dots of the thermal head is displayed. * When “Motor Feed” is selected, the PF motor turns to feed media forward or backward. [When “Head Check” is selected] [When “Motor Feed” is selected] PASS 0000dots W Exit S Enter X W Motor Feed T Forward Exit Enter X 8. Press the [PAUSE] (W) key to return to “Service Mode” menu. 9. To check other submenu, repeat from Step 3. Otherwise, turn off the power to terminate Factory/Service mode. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-50 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-3. Operation Panel Operation procedure for “Service Counter” submenu: 1. Enter Factory/Service mode by turning on the power while pressing and holding the [MENU], [FEED] and [STOP] keys. “Factory Setup” main menu appears. 2. Press the [MENU] (T) or [FEED] (S) key until “Service Mode” main menu appears. 3. Press the [STOP] (X) key to enter Service mode. 4. Press the [MENU] (T) or [FEED] (S) key until “Service Counter” submenu appears. Service Counter S W Exit T Enter X 5. Press the [STOP] (X) key to select “Service Counter” submenu. Then, the service counter length since the service counter is reset last is displayed. * To reset the service counter, proceed to the next step. Otherwise, proceed to Step 7. S Length T 0123.456 km W Exit Enter X 6. Resetting the service counter: 1) Press the [STOP] (X) key. 2) Press the [MENU] (T) or [FEED] (S) key and select “Yes”. S W Reset? No Exit T S Enter X W Reset? Yes Exit T Enter X 3) Press the [STOP] (X) key to perform resetting. 7. Press the [PAUSE] (W) key to return to “Service Mode” menu. 8. To check other submenu, repeat from Step 3. Otherwise, turn off the power to terminate Factory/Service mode. 2-51 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-4. Interface 2-4. Interface 2-4-1. Serial Interface (1) Specifications System Signal level Baud rate Data length Stop bit Parity Connector Start/stop asynchronous full duplex communication RS-232C 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps 7 bits, 8 bits 1 bit, 2 bits Odd, even, none D-SUB DBR40-251F100 25PIN (ACON) (2) Signal line and pin assignment Pin No. 1 2 Signal Abbr. FG TXD Signal name Frame ground Transmit Data 3 RXD Receive data 4 RTS 5 6 NC DSR Request To Send -----Data Set Ready 7 8-13 14 15-19 20 SGND NC VCC NC DTR 21-25 NC CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Signal ground -----+5V -----Data Terminal Ready ------ Function Protective grounding Signal line that transmits data from the printer to the host Signal line that transmits data from the host to the printer Pulled up to +5.4V through 3.3 kΩ Not used Signal line that is active when the host can interface with the printer Signal grounding line Not used (Factory use only ) Not used Signal line that is active when the printer can interface with the host Not used 2-52 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-4. Interface (3) Protocol XON/XOFF system: Controlled with the data transmission request signal X-ON (11H) code and the data transmission stop request signal X-OFF (13H) code. The conditions for the X-ON code output are as follows: • When the printer is turned from off-line to on-line. • When the remaining of receive buffer is 1024 bytes or more after sending X-OFF code. The conditions for the X-OFF code output are as follows: • When the remainder of receive buffer is 128 bytes or less. • When the printer is turned from on-line to off-line. - When the media end is detected. - When a printer error occurs. 0 16K 16K bytes Received data 1024 bytes X-ON code sending 128 bytes X-OFF code sending READY/BUSY System: DTR signal is controlled with READY ("High")/BUSY ("Low") level. DTR turns to "High (Ready)" in the following conditions: • When the printer is in on-line mode, and • When the remaining buffer is 128 bytes or more. (After DTR becomes "High", DTR retains "High" until the remaining buffer becomes 1024 bytes or less.) DTR turns to "Low (Busy)" in the following conditions: • When the printer is in off-line mode. • When the remaining buffer is less than 128 bytes. (After DTR becomes "Low", DTR retains "Low" until the remaining buffer becomes 1024 bytes or more.) 2-53 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-4. Interface 2-4-2. Parallel Interface (1) Specifications Transmission system Receive buffer size Transmission modes Signal level 8-bit parallel data 16K bytes Compatible mode It is an asynchronous forward channel mode to send the byte width data from the host to the printer. The interface line of the data is operated in accordance with signal line definitions of Centronics. NIBBLE mode It is an asynchronous reverse channel mode to send the data from the printer to the host. In Nibble mode, 4-bit data (half byte) is sent at a time using the 4 status lines (FAULT, SELECT, PE, and BUSY). To send one complete byte data, the printer sends 2 nibbles (8 bits in total) to the host. Nibble mode is usually combined with Compatible mode to create a complete bi-directional channel. ECP mode ECP mode permits bi-directional asynchronous data transmission, and by means of interlock handshake, it does not require the timing necessary with Compatible mode. IEEE1284 compatible (2) Signal line and pin assignment Pin No. 1 2-9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19-30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Signal name STROBE DATA0-7 ACKNLG BUSY PERROR SELECT I/O Input Input Output Output Output Output AUTOFD NC SGND FGND P.L.H GND PRIME FAULT GND NC FUSE SELECTIN Input ------Output --Input Output ------Input CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Function in Compatible Mode Strobe signal to read in 8-bit data 8-bit parallel signal 8-bit data request signal Signal specifying printer busy Signal specifying media end Signal specifying if the printer is on-line (printing enabled) or off-line Invalid (ignored) Not used Signal ground Frame ground Peripheral logic high (pulled up to +5V at 1KΩ) Ground for twisted pair return Printer reset Signal specifying printer error Signal ground Not used Not used Invalid (ignored) 2-54 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-4. Interface (3) Parallel port status signals when an error occurs The following table shows the status signal change when an error occurs. Error Paper end Busy: PError: Select: Fault: Compatible mode L→H L→H H→L H→L Error other than paper end • Head open • Other Busy: PError: Select: Fault: L→H L → unchanged H→L H→L Conditions for Busy • Receive buffer full • Data being read • Error (4) Compatible timing specification [When power is on] (Timing to go on-line) Power On Reset BUSY ACK SELECT 2-55 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-4. Interface [While receiving data] Data0~7 Strobe BUSY 0.5µs 0.5µs 0.5µs Note: BUSY goes “High” at the falling edge of Strobe, and data is latched at the leading edge of Strobe. [While receiving PRIME signal] 10~15µsec or more PRIME BUSY Ack Fault SELECT Note: If the PRIME signal width is 10 µsec or less, it is not accepted. BUSY goes to “High” when the PRIME signal is accepted by the printer. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2-56 Chapter 2 Operating Principles 2-4. Interface [Timing relationship between BUSY and ACK] Center BUSY ACK About 2 µsec 2-4-3. USB Interface (1) Specifications Standards Transmission speed Receive buffer Connector Complies with Universal Serial Bus Specification Compatible with 12Mbps (full speed) transmission 16K bytes DUSB DUSB-BRA42-T11 (DDK) (2) Signal line and pin arrangement Pin No. 1 2 3 4 Signal code VBUS D+ DGND Signal USB power Signal line + Signal line GND Function USB power (+5V) + signal line - signal line GND 2-57 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance CHAPTER 3 DISASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance Table of Contents 3-1. Maintenance Precautions ............................................................................................... 4 3-2. Cleaning.......................................................................................................................... 5 3-3. Lubrication/Adhesive Agent ............................................................................................ 5 3-3-1. Lubrication.......................................................................................................... 5 3-3-2. Adhesive Agent .................................................................................................. 5 3-4. Maintenance Tools List ................................................................................................... 6 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication .................................................................... 7 3-5-1. Unit, Head ............................................................................................................ 9 3-5-2. Unit, Roller Platen and Gear, One-way ................................................................ 10 (1) Removing the “Unit, Roller Platen” ............................................................... 10 (2) Removing the “Gear, One-way”................................................................. 11 3-5-3. SA, Ope-pane PCB and SA, Cover Open Sens ................................................... 12 3-5-4. Unit, Power Supply............................................................................................... 13 3-5-5. SA, Main PCB and Unit, Centro PCB ................................................................... 15 (1) Disconnecting all connectors from the “SA, Main PCB”................................ 15 (2) Removing “SA, Main PCB” and “Unit, Centro PCB” .................................. 16 3-5-6. SA, Fan ................................................................................................................ 17 3-5-7. SA1, Top Cover .................................................................................................... 17 3-5-8. Unit, Mechanism................................................................................................... 18 3-5-9. Each Unit on the “Unit, Mechanism”..................................................................... 20 3-5-10. SA, Base Guide Open ........................................................................................ 22 (1) Removing the “SA, Base Guide Open”...................................................... 22 (2) Disassembling the “SA, Base Guide Open” .............................................. 22 3-5-11. Unit, Sensor Adjust ............................................................................................. 23 (1) Removing the “Unit, Sensor Adjust” .......................................................... 23 (2) Disassembling the “Unit, Sensor Adjust” ................................................... 24 3-5-12. Unit, Frame Ribbon L ......................................................................................... 26 3-5-13. Disassembling the “SA, Front Tension Arm”....................................................... 29 3-5-14. Disassembling the “SA, Frame Ribbon R”.......................................................... 29 3-5-15. Disassembling the “Unit, Frame Rear” ............................................................... 29 3-5-16. Disassembling the “Unit, Frame U” .................................................................... 30 3-5-17. Disassembling the “Unit, Frame” ........................................................................ 31 3-5-18. Disassembling the Rewinder Part (CL-S700R Only).......................................... 33 (1) Separating the Rewinder part .................................................................... 34 (2) Removing the Rewinder Mechanism block................................................... 36 (3) Removing the “Door, Rewinder” and “SA1, Peeler” ...................................... 37 (4) Removing the “SA, Peel Sensor”/Friction Roller/Idle Rewinder Roller ...... 38 (5) Removing the “SA, Rewinder Motor”......................................................... 39 (6) Removing the “SA, Interlock SW”.............................................................. 40 (7) Removing Rollers ...................................................................................... 41 (7-1) Measure Sensor Rollers (4 pcs.) .......................................................41 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-2 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance (7-2) Damper Roller (3 pcs.) of the Rewinder Cover block.........................41 (7-3) Damper Roller (4 pcs.) of the Rewinder Mechanism block ................41 (7-4) Peel Roll on the Printer part...............................................................41 (8) Removing “SA, Rewinder PCB”................................................................. 41 (9) Notes on assembling the springs .............................................................. 42 3-6. Adjustments .................................................................................................................... 43 3-6-1. Transparent/Reflective Sensor Position Adjustment............................................. 43 (1) Sensor position adjustment (Factory mode).............................................. 43 (2) Sensor sensitivity adjustment (Factory mode)........................................... 43 (2-1) Init Fix-Thru sensitivity adjustment ....................................................44 (2-2) Init Fix-Refl sensitivity adjustment .....................................................46 (2-3) Init Adj-Thru sensitivity adjustment ....................................................48 (2-4) Init Adj-Refl sensitivity adjustment .....................................................50 3-6-2. Belt Tension Adjustment ....................................................................................... 52 3-6-3. Ribbon Skew Adjustment ..................................................................................... 53 3-6-4. Ribbon Tension Adjustment .................................................................................. 54 3-3 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-1. Maintenance Precautions 3-1. Maintenance Precautions Warning - Before starting disassembly/reassembly or mechanical adjustment, be sure to disconnect the power cord from the power source. - Do not replace a fuse with the power switch turned on. - When replacing a fuse, use the same rating and type since it is provided to prevent fire and damage to the “Unit, Power Supply”. Caution - DO NOT adjust VR1, VR2, VR3 and VR4 on the “SA, Main PCB”. (Leave them at the factory setting condition.) If it is turned, media sensor sensitivity is changed and the media detection will not be correctly made. - Do not disassemble/reassemble or adjust the machine, if it functions properly. Particularly, do not loosen screws on any component, unless necessary. - After completing an inspection and before turning on the power, be sure to check that there is no abnormality. - Never try to print without media. - Check that the media is properly set. - Do not lay anything on the cover or lean against it during maintenance or while the printer is in operation. - During maintenance, be careful not to leave parts or screws unattached or loose inside the printer. - When handling a printed circuit board, do not use gloves, etc., which can easily cause static electricity. Since ICs, such as CPU, RAM and ROM, might be destroyed by static electricity, do not touch lead wires or windows unnecessarily. - Do not put the printed circuit boards directly on the printer or on the floor. - When disassembling or reassembling, check wires for any damage and do not pinch or damage them. Also, run wires as they were. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-4 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-2. Cleaning, 3-3. Lubrication 3-2. Cleaning Cleaning spots are listed below. Cleaning Position Cabinet Thermal head Platen Rollers (for CL-S700R only) Media running surface Description Wipe soiled parts of the printer with a clean dry cloth. Remove bits of media, etc., using tweezers. Note: When cleaning, be careful not to scratch the equipment or to bend parts, etc. Clean the thermal head with the head cleaner provided. Clean the platen with a soft cloth. Clean the peeler rollers (on the front cover side and printer side) with a soft cloth. Wipe off media refuse, etc., on and around the media running surface. Clean inside the printer in accordance with the following: • Cleaning frequency: Every 6 months or 300 hours of operation. (Whichever comes first) • Materials: Dry cloth (gauze or soft cloth) and thermal head cleaner 3-3. Lubrication/Adhesive Agent 3-3-1. Lubrication (1) Lubrication frequency This is a maintenance-free machine and requires no lubrication under normal use. However, the machine should be lubricated whenever it is disassembled and reassembled, or when lubricated parts are cleaned. The parts and places to be lubricated are indicated in the disassembly procedure. (2) Types of lubricant • Floil G-311S (by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.) (3) Quantity of lubricant Small quantity.......... ............. Ordinary quantity .... ......... Large quantity.......... ....... About 1 drop. About 3 to 4 drops. About 0.2 mm thick for grease. Apply sufficiently. 3-3-2. Adhesive Agent • ThreeBond 1401B (by ThreeBond Co., Ltd.) 3-5 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-4. Maintenance Tools List 3-4. Maintenance Tools List Maintenance tools shown below are needed when replacing the maintenance parts such as the “SA, Main PCB” and “Unit, Motor”. Maintenance Tools List No. 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Name Phillips Screwdriver (Length 200 mm) Phillips Screwdriver (Length 100 mm) Flat-blade Screwdriver (Length 100 mm) Tweezers Round Nose Pliers Cutting Nippers Soldering Iron (30W) Volt-ohm Meter Spring Gauge Spring Gauge Hex Wrench 12 Weight 2 3 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Q'ty 1 Description For 3~4 mm screws 1 For 2~3 mm screws 1 4.3 mm width 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2000gf 500gf 2 mm 450g 3-6 Remarks Belt tension adjustment Ribbon tension adjustment Ribbon tension adjustment Ribbon tension adjustment Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication [Disassembly Flow] CL-S700, CL-S703, CL-S700R (Printer Part) Unit, Head See 3-5-1. Unit, Roller Platen See 3-5-2. SA, Ope-pane PCB and SA, Cover Open Sens SA1, Top Cover Top Cover See 3-5-3. See 3-5-7. See 3-5-4. Unit, Power Supply See 3-5-5 (1). Connectors on the SA, Main PCB SA, Main PCB and Unit, Centro PCB Unit, Mechanism See 3-5-6. SA, Fan See 3-5-5 (2). See 3-5-8. Unit, Frame Ribbon L See 3-5-12. SA, Front Tension Arm See 3-5-13. SA, Frame Ribbon R See 3-5-14. Unit, Frame Rear See 3-5-15. Unit, Frame U See 3-5-16. SA, Sensor U (Fixed) See 3-5-17 “Unit, Frame”. SA, Sensor Bottom (Fixed) Unit, Motor See 3-5-17 “Unit, Frame”. See 3-5-17 “Unit, Frame”. SA, Connect PCB (CL-S700/CL-S703) See 3-5-17 “Unit, Frame”. See 3-5-11. Unit, Sensor Adjust See 3-5-10. SA, Sensor U (Adjustable) SA, Sensor Bottom (Adjustable) SA, Base Guide Open 3-7 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication [How to refer to the exploded diagram in Chapter 5 “Parts List”] This section explains how to disassemble, reassemble and lubricate. However, for disassembly procedures, illustrations are not fully provided. For parts that are not illustrated here, the parts location Nos. in the drawing in Chapter 5 “Parts List” are stated. Example: Remove 3 screws (BH, M3x5) [1-37] and detach “Unit, PCB” [1-12] backwardly. In this example, [1-37] and [1-12] are the parts location Nos. Please refer to the parts location Nos. “1-37” and “1-12” in Drawing No. 1 in Chapter 5 “Parts List”. When reassembling parts, follow “Note(s) on reassembling” described at the end of disassembly procedure. When the parts to be lubricated are replaced, necessity of lubrication is stated in the reassembling procedure. The places to be lubricated are indicated in the drawings in Chapter 5, with the mark . CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-8 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-1. Unit, Head Caution - Carefully handle the “Unit, Head” when disassembling and reassembling so as not to damage the thermal elements of the “Unit, Head”. Especially, avoid contacting the thermal elements with the metal part, etc. The “Unit, Head” can be removed easily without detaching any other parts. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the top cover. Open the head block by pushing the head open lever. While holding the “Unit, Head”, turn the screw until the “Unit, Head” comes off. Remove the “SA, Head Cable” from the “Unit, Head”. (Head Block) Screw (Head Open Lever) Head Earth Plate SA, Head Cable Unit, Head Notes on reassembling: • When attaching the “Unit, Head”, do not strongly push it against the head block. The Head Earth Plate may come off if you push the “Unit, Head” strongly. • Securely fasten the “Unit, Head” with the screw. • When you replace the “Unit, Head” with a new one, adjust the angle of head spacer shaft, if ribbon wrinkles are not removed. (This adjustment will be required only when satisfactory results are not obtained by adjusting the ribbon tension with the adjusting screws of the “Unit, Ribbon Frame L”.) Refer to “3-6-3. Ribbon Skew Adjustment”. 3-9 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-2. Unit, Roller Platen and Gear, One-way The “Unit, Roller Platen” can be removed easily with the following procedure. The “Unit, Roller Platen” includes the “Gear, One-way” which can be separately replaced. (1) Removing the “Unit, Roller Platen” 1. Open the top cover. 2. Open the head block by pushing the head open lever. 3. Open the sensor arm block by pushing the sensor arm open lever. 4. Remove 1 screw (BH, M3x5K) and detach the “Cover, Pulley” upwardly after disengaging its 2 claws. 5. Push the lever of the tension plate unit downward to set the “Belt, Platen Drive” free and remove the “Belt, Platen Drive” to the right. 6. Lift the “Unit, Roller Platen” and remove it upwardly. (Head Block) BH, M3x5K Cover, Pulley Unit, Roller Platen (Sensor Arm Open Lever) Belt, Platen Drive (Unit, Tension Plate) Note on reassembling: • Be sure that the “Belt, Platen Drive” is securely installed on the gear of the “Unit, Roller Platen” via the “Unit, Tension Plate”. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-10 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication (2) Removing the “Gear, One-way” 1. Remove the “Unit, Roller Platen” referring to above “(1) Removing the “Unit, Roller Platen””.(1) Removing the “Unit, Roller Platen”(1) Removing the “Unit, Roller Platen” 2. Disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 4) and remove the “Gear, One-way” from the shaft of the “Unit, Roller Platen”. Gear, One-way E-ring, 4 Note on reassembling: • Insert the plastic washer into the projection of the “Gear, One-way” (on the gear part side). Then, insert the “Gear, One-way” into the shaft of the “Unit, Roller Platen”, while facing the gear part of the “Gear, One-way” toward the “Unit, Roller Platen”. E-ring, 4 Gear, One-way Gear part Plastic washer 3-11 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-3. SA, Ope-pane PCB and SA, Cover Open Sens 1. Open the top cover. 2. Remove 1 screw (PH, M3x12) and detach the “Guide, Top Cover”. 3. Remove 2 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x5) (1 screw for new type) and detach the Ope-pane block frontward. 4. Disconnect the “Cable Ope-pane FFC” from the “SA, Ope-pane PCB”. 5. Remove 3 screws (PHT (#2), M3x6) and detach the “SA, Ope-pane Plate” (with the “SA, Ope-pane PCB”) from the Ope-pane Cover block. 6. Remove 2 screws (BH, M3x5) and detach the “SA, Ope-pane PCB” from the “SA, Ope-pane Plate”. 7. Disconnect the connector of “SA, Cover Open Sens” from the “SA, Ope-pane PCB”. 8. Remove 1 screw (PHT (#2), M3x6) and detach the “SA, Cover Open Sens” from the Ope-pane Cover block. 9. Detach four switches (PAUSE, FEED, STOP and MENU). 10. Peel off the “Sheet Ope-Pane” from the “Cover Ope-Pane” and remove the “Cover LCD” from the “Sheet Ope-Pane”. PH, M3x12 Guide, Top Cover Cable, Ope-pane FFC PH (SW+PW), M3x5 SA, Ope-pane Plate A SA, Ope-pane PCB (Blue Tape) Cover, LCD PHT (#2), M3x6 SA, Cover Open Sens PHT (#2), M3x6 Sheet, Ope-Pane BH, M3x5 B Switch, Feed Switch, Stop Switch, Menu Switch, Pause Cover, Ope-Pane Notes on reassembling: • Assemble each switch in place. • When assembling the “SA, Ope-pane Plate” in the Ope-pane Cover block, fit the holes “A” and “B” to the protrusions. • Insert the “Cable Ope-pane FFC” with its blue tape facing up. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-12 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-4. Unit, Power Supply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Open the top cover and remove 4 screws (1BH, M3x5), then detach the Top Cover block. Open the head block by pushing the head open lever. Open the sensor arm block by pushing the sensor arm open lever. Remove 1 screw (2BH, M3x5) and detach the “Cover, Inner Paper”. On the left rear side of the printer, remove 4 screws (3BH, M3x5K) and 1 screw (4BH, M3x5). Then, while pushing the rear cover toward the rear to make a clearance, remove the Inner Power Cover block to the right. (See the magnified figure.) Remove 2 cable clamps. (Access to their locks from the bottom of the printer and release the locks.) Remove 1 screw (5BH (N), M4x4) and 1 toothed lock washer (5EXT, T (N), 4). Remove 1 screw (6BH, M3x5K) and 2 screws (7PH (SW+PW), M3x5), and detach the “Plate, Power” (with “Unit, Power Supply”) to the right. Disconnect 2 connectors and remove 4 screws (8PH (SW+PW), M3x5) from the “Unit, Power Supply”. (Before disconnecting the upper right connector, release its lock.) !" #$ % & ' (" ) * 3-13 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication Notes on reassembling: • When connecting connectors to the “Unit, Power Supply”, be sure to insert them securely. • Pass the wires into the cable clamp as they were. • When fastening the earth wire of the “Unit, Power Supply” to the chassis with the screw (5) and the toothed lock washer (5), be sure to check the earth wire of the AC outlet runs as follows. If not arrange it as shown. Arrange the wire like this. 5 Earth Wire of AC Inlet Caution - To satisfy the regulated standards, run the earth wire of the AC outlet as shown above. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-14 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-5. SA, Main PCB and Unit, Centro PCB The following 2 steps are explained here. - Disconnecting all connectors from the “SA, Main PCB” - Removing “SA, Main PCB” and “Unit, Centro PCB” (1) Disconnecting all connectors from the “SA, Main PCB” 1. Open the top cover. 2. Open the head block by pushing the head open lever. 3. Open the sensor arm block by pushing the sensor arm open lever. 4. Remove 1 screw (1BH, M3x5) and detach the “Cover, Inner Paper”. 5. Remove 1 screw (2BH, M3x5K) and 1 screw (3BH, M3x5) and detach the Inner PCB Front Cover block. 1 Cover, Inner Paper Inner PCB Front Cover Block 2 3 BH, M3x3K Unit, PCB Clamp, Main Cable 3-15 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 6. Disconnect all connectors from the “SA, Main PCB”. J15 and J16: Release the lock before pulling out. Ribbon Encoder (Ribbon Running Sensor/Ribbon End Sensor) SA, Head Up SW (Head Up Sensor) Adjustable Sensor (Transparent sensor) SA, Main PCB Front Fixed Sensor (Transparent sensor) J7 J6 J9 J8 J16 J22 J21 J12 Adjustable Sensor (Reflective sensor) J11 Front Fixed Sensor (Reflective sensor) SA, Connect PCB (J803) (CL-S700/CL-S703) SA, Rewinder PCB (J502) (CL-S700R) SA, Fan J14 J3 J5 J15 SA, Connect PCB (J801) (CL-S700/CL-S703) SA, Rewinder PCB (J501) (CL-S700R) J4 Ope-Pane FFC Cable Front Unit, Head (Blue Tape) Unit, Motor (Thermistor) Unit, Motor Unit, Power Supply 7. Open the “Clamp, Main Cable” and take out each cable. In the above figure, the cable of which connector color is tinted (blue) runs through the “Clamp, Main Cable”. They are J4, J5, J6, J7, J8, J9, J21 and J22. Notes on reassembling: • Clamp the following cables with the “Clamp, Main Cable”. The cables with tinted (blue) connectors in the above figure: J4, J5, J6, J7, J8, J9, J21 and J22. • Insert the “Cable, Ope-pane FFC” with its blue tape facing the right. (2) Removing “SA, Main PCB” and “Unit, Centro PCB” 1. Remove all connectors from the “SA, Main PCB”. (See above.) 2. On the rear right of the printer, remove 3 screws (BH, M3x5K) and detach “Unit, PCB”. (See the figure on the previous page.) 3. Disconnect the “SA, Centro Cable” [14-1] from the “SA, Main PCB” [14-2] and the “Unit, Centro PCB” [14-4]. 4. Remove 2 lock screws [14-5] and 2 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x5), and detach the “SA, Main PCB” [14-2] from the “SA, Holder I/F” [14-3]. 5. Remove 2 screws (BH, M3x5) [14-7] and detach the “Unit, Centro PCB” [14-4] from the “SA, Holder I/F” [14-3]. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-16 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-6. SA, Fan 1. Disconnect J12 (for “SA, Fan”) from the “SA, Main PCB”. Refer to “3-5-5. SA, Main PCB and Unit, Centro PCB” - “(1) Disconnecting all connectors from the “SA, Main PCB””. 2. Remove the “Plate, Power” [1-14] (together with “Unit, Power Supply”). Refer to “3-5-4. Unit, Power Supply. 3. Remove 4 screws (PH (SW+PW), M4x30) [1-40] and detach the “SA, Fan” [1-20]. Notes on reassembling: • Assemble the “SA, Fan” [1-20] so that its cable runs from the right bottom side as shown in Drawing 1 “General Assembly” in Chapter 5 “Parts List” (the label of “SA, Fan” will face backward). In this direction, air flows from inside to outside. • When assembling the “Plate, Power” [1-14] (together with “Unit, Power Supply”), observe the “Notes on reassembling” in “3-5-4. Unit, Power Supply. 3-5-7. SA1, Top Cover 1. Open the top cover. 2. Remove 2 screws (BH, M3x5K) [1-39] and detach the 2 “Cover, Hinge” [1-4] from the top cover by releasing their claws. 3. Remove 4 screws (BH, M3x5) [1-37] and detach the Top Cover block from the printer. 4. Remove 4 screws (BH, M3x5) [1-37] and detach the 2 “Stopper, Hinge” [1-8] and the “SA, Hinge” [1-9] from the “Unit, Top Cover” [1-3]. 5. Remove 2 screws (PHT (#2), M3x6) [10-6] and remove the Front Top Cover block from the “SA1, Top Cover” [10-1]. 6. Pull out the “Cover, Cutter Blind” [10-4] and take off the “Logo, CITIZEN” [10-3] from the “Cover, Front Top” [10-2]. 7. Remove the “Cover, Window” [10-5] and 4 “Spacer Leg, Case U” [10-7] from the “SA1, Top Cover” [10-1]. 3-17 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-8. Unit, Mechanism 1. Open the top cover. 2. Disconnect all connectors except J11 (Power Supply Unit cable) and J12 (Fan SA cable) from the “SA, Main PCB”. Refer to “3-5-5. SA, Main PCB and Unit, Centro PCB” - “(1) Disconnecting all connectors from the “SA, Main PCB””. 3. Remove 1 screw (1BH, M3x5K) and detach the Cable Cover. 4. Remove 1 screw (2PH, M3x12) and detach the “Guide, Top Cover”. 5. Remove 2 screws (3PH (SW+PW), M3x5) (1 screw for new type) and detach the “SA, Ope-pane” frontward. 6. Disconnect the “Cable, Ope-pane FFC” from the “SA, Ope-pane”. 7. Remove 1 screw (4BH, M3x5K) and 1 screw (5PH (SW+PW), M3x5), and detach the “SA, Front Right”. 8. Remove 2 screws (6BH, M3x5) and detach the “SA, Front Center” by drawing it out. 9. Disengage the Power Switch from the chassis by lifting it upwardly. 10. Remove 5 screws (7PH (SW+PW), M3x5) and 1 screw (8PH (SW+PW), M3x5), and gently detach the “Unit, Mechanism” forward after lifting it a little. 7 8 Unit, Mechanism Power Switch J3 J12 J15 1 Cable Cover 2 Guide, Top Cover 3 SA, Ope-Pane Cable, Ope-Pane FFC 4 SA, Case L A SA, Front Center 5 6 SA, Front Right CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-18 B Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication Notes on reassembling: • Fit the holes in the chassis of the “Unit, Mechanism” to the protrusions of the “SA, Case L” to securely seat the “Unit, Mechanism” onto the “SA, Case L”. • Securely fasten the earth wire with the screw (8PH (SW+PW), M3x5). • Install the Power Switch as shown in the figure (set its “l (ON)” side to the right). • When assembling the “SA, Front Center”, assemble it so that its claws “A” shown in the figure are securely inserted into the slits “B” on the “SA, Case L”. • See the following wiring route for “Unit, Mechanism” and pass the cables (J4 to J9, J21 and J22) through the “Clamp, Main Cable”. [Wiring route for “Unit, Mechanism”] J7 J22 J3 J16 J15 Other Connectors (J4, J5, J6, J8, J9, J21) Clamp, Main Cable • When assembling the Cable Cover, first insert its right side while aligning the slit “C” and then fit the Cable Cover by shifting in the direction of the arrow Also, be sure that the cables are correctly routed in the Cable Cover as shown below. + 3-19 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-9. Each Unit on the “Unit, Mechanism” The following shows the procedures how to disassemble each unit from the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to the Drawing No. 2 “Unit, Mechanism” in Chapter 5 “Parts List”. 1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-8. Unit, Mechanism. 2. Remove the “SA, Base Guide Open” [2-10]. Refer to “3-5-10. SA, Base Guide Open. 3. Remove the “Unit, Sensor Adjust” [2-12]. Refer to “3-5-11. Unit, Sensor Adjust. 4. Remove the “Unit, Frame Ribbon L” [2-19]. Refer to “3-5-12. Unit, Frame Ribbon L. 5. Remove the “SA, Front Tension Arm” [2-4]. Refer to “3-5-13. Disassembling the “SA, Front Tension Arm””. 6. Remove the “SA, Frame Ribbon R” [2-9]. 1) Remove 1 screw (PH (SW+PW), M3x5) [2-22] and 2 screws (FT, M3x6) [2-23], and detach the “SA, Frame Ribbon R” [2-9] upwardly. For disassembling the parts of the “SA, Frame Ribbon R” [2-9], refer to “3-5-14. Disassembling the “SA, Frame Ribbon R””. 7. Remove the “Unit, Frame Rear” [2-5]. 1) Remove 2 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x5) [2-22] and detach the “Unit, Frame Rear” [2-5]. For disassembling the parts of the “Unit, Frame Rear” [2-5], refer to “3-5-15. Disassembling the “Unit, Frame Rear””. 8. Remove the “Unit, Frame U” [2-6]. 1) Remove the “Unit, Head” [2-8] referring to “3-5-1. Unit, Head. 2) With the head block opened, disengage the “Spring, Head Up” [2-7] from the “Unit, Frame U” [2-6] and the “Unit, Frame” [2-18]. 3) Remove 1 screw (PH, M4x6) [2-24] and detach Damper [2-14] and “SA, Head Up SW” [2-16]. 4) Remove the Damper Pin [2-15] while swinging the “Unit, Frame U” [2-6] as it presses down the Damper Pin [2-15], and then detach the “Unit, Frame U” [2-6] from the “Unit, Frame” [2-18]. For disassembling the parts of the “Unit, Frame U” [2-6], refer to “3-5-16. Disassembling the “Unit, Frame U””. Note on reassembling: • Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the following points (refer to the places marked with in Drawing No. 2 “Unit, Mechanism” for the Printer Part in Chapter 5 “Parts List”): • Damper Pin [2-15]: Both ends • “Unit, Frame U” [2-6]: Where the “Spring, Head Up” [2-7] is to be hooked • “Unit, Frame” [2-18]: Where the “Unit, Frame U” [2-6] is to be hooked CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-20 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 9. Remove the “Unit, Frame” [2-18]. 1) Detach the “Sheet 2, Power Protect” [2-13] and “Clamp, Main Cable” [2-17] from the “Unit, Frame” [2-18]. For disassembling parts of the “Unit, Frame” [2-18], refer to “3-5-17. Disassembling the “Unit, Frame””. Note on reassembling: • Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the following points (refer to the places marked with in Drawing No. 2 “Unit, Mechanism” for the Printer Part in Chapter 5 “Parts List”): • “Unit, Frame” [2-18]: Where the “Spring, Head Up” [2-7] is to be hooked • “Unit, Frame” [2-18]: Where the “Unit, Frame U” [2-6] is to be hooked 3-21 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-10. SA, Base Guide Open (1) Removing the “SA, Base Guide Open” Note: The “SA, Base Guide Open” can be removed without removing the “Unit, Mechanism”. 1. Open the top cover. 2. Open the head block by pushing the head open lever. 3. Remove 2 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x5) and detach the “SA, Base Guide Open”. Refer to the figure shown below. PH (SW+PW), M3x5 SA, Base Guide Open Spring, Damper R Spring, Damper L (2) Disassembling the “SA, Base Guide Open” 1. Remove 2 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x5) [7-8] and pull out 2 “SA, Damper Shaft” [7-1] on both sides. 2. Remove the Damper Frame block (Plastic) from the “Frame, Damper” (Metal) [7-2]. 3. Remove the “Spring, Damper L” [7-6] and “Spring, Damper R” [7-7], disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 4) [7-3], and pull out the “Shaft, Damper” [7-4] from the “Frame, Damper” (Plastic) [7-5]. Note on reassembling: • Assemble the Damper L Spring [7-6] and “Spring, Damper R” [7-7] referring to above figure. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-22 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-11. Unit, Sensor Adjust (1) Removing the “Unit, Sensor Adjust” Note: The “Unit, Sensor Adjust” can be removed without removing the “Unit, Mechanism”. 1. Open the top cover. 2. Disconnect the connectors J7 and J22 from the “SA, Main PCB”. Refer to “3-5-5. SA, Main PCB and Unit, Centro PCB” - “(1) Disconnecting all connectors from the “SA, Main PCB””. 3. Remove 2 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x5) and detach both “Unit, Sensor Adjust” and “SA, Base Guide Open”. 4. Remove the “SA, Base Guide Open” from the “Unit, Sensor Adjust”. Refer to “3-5-10. SA, Base Guide Open. 5. Peel off the Ground Brush from the “Unit, Sensor Adjust”. Notes on reassembling: • Be sure to lower the “SA, Sensor U” (Fixed type) before assembling the “Unit, Sensor Adjust”. • Run the cables (J7 and J22) as shown and be sure that they are not pinched by the “Unit, Sensor Adjust”. PH (SW+PW), M3x5 SA, Base Guide Open J22 J7 Unit, Sensor Adjust SA, Sensor U (Fixed type) Ground Brush 3-23 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication (2) Disassembling the “Unit, Sensor Adjust” 1. Remove the “SA, Sensor U” (Adjustable type) [8-9] and “Shaft, Screw Sensor U” [8-5]. 1) Shift the “Cover, Sensor Adjust” [8-2] to the right and remove it upwardly. Peel off the “Open Guide Seal” [8-1] from the “Cover, Sensor Adjust” [8-2]. 2) On the right side, disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 2) [8-28], shift the “Shaft, Screw Sensor U” [8-5] to the left about 2 mm (0.08”), and remove the block (consisting of “Shaft, Screw Sensor U” [8-5] and “SA, Sensor U” (Adjustable type) [8-9], etc.) to the right. 3) Peel off Position Label [8-6], remove 2 screws (No. 0, FHT (BT#1), M2x4) [8-27], Stopper Plate [8-7] and Move Pin [8-8] from the “SA, Sensor U” (Adjustable type) [8-9]. 4) Cut the Wire Tie [8-10]. 5) Pull out the “SA, Sensor U” (Adjustable type) [8-9] from the “Shaft, Screw Sensor U” [8-5]. 6) Disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 3) [8-26], pull out the “Pin, Teeth Spring 1.2x8” [8-3], and remove the Screw Gear [8-4] to the left from the “Shaft, Screw Sensor U” [8-5]. Notes on reassembling: • Do not reuse the “Pin, Teeth Spring 1.2x8” [8-3]. • Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the “Shaft, Screw Sensor U” [8-5] at 3 places (marked with in Drawing No. 8 “Unit, Sensor Adjust” for the Printer Part in Chapter 5 “Parts List”). 2. Remove the “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Adjustable type) [8-24] and “Shaft, Screw Sensor L” [8-23]. 1) Remove 1 screw (PH (SW+PW), M3x5) [8-29] and detach the Ratchet Spring [8-31]. 2) On the right side, disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 3) [8-26], shift the “Shaft, Screw Sensor L” [8-23] to the left about 2 mm, and remove the block (consisting of “Shaft, Screw Sensor L” [8-23] and “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Adjustable type) [8-24], etc.) to the right. 3) Cut the Wire Tie [8-10]. 4) Pull out the “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Adjustable type) [8-24] from the “Shaft, Screw Sensor L” [8-23]. 5) Disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 3) [8-26], pull out the “Pin, Teeth Spring 1.2x8” [8-3], and remove the Screw Gear [8-4] to the left from the “Shaft, Screw Sensor L” [8-23]. Also, remove the Ratchet Gear [8-19] from the “Shaft, Screw Sensor L” [8-23], after pulling out the “Pin, Teeth Spring 1.2x8” [8-3]. Notes on reassembling: • Do not reuse the “Pin, Teeth Spring 1.2x8” [8-3]. • Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the “Shaft, Screw Sensor L” [8-23] at 3 places (marked with in Drawing No. 8 “Unit, Sensor Adjust” for the Printer Part in Chapter 5 “Parts List”). 3. Remove the Open Guide Lever [8-12]. 1) Disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 2) [8-28] and remove the Open Guide Lever [8-12] and Open Guide Lever Spring [8-13]. 4. Remove the Paper Guide Plate [8-14]. 1) Remove 2 screws (PH, M3x3) [8-30] and detach the Paper Guide Plate [8-14]. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-24 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 5. Remove the “SA, Open Guide U” [8-11]. 1) Pull out “Knob, Sensor Adjust” [8-20], disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 3) [8-26], and remove the “Bushing 3, Adjust Sensor” [8-18] and “Spring, Guide Sensor Up” [8-17] from the “Shaft, Sensor Adjust” [8-16]. 2) Disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 2) [8-28], pull out “Pin, Teeth Spring 1.2x8” [8-3], remove the Screw Gear [8-4] and “Shaft, Sensor Adjust” [8-16], and detach the “SA, Open Guide U” [8-11] from the “SA, Open Guide L” [8-22]. Note on reassembling: • Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the following points (refer to the places marked with in Drawing No. 8 “Unit, Sensor Adjust” for the Printer Part in Chapter 5 “Parts List”): • “Bushing 3, Adjust Sensor” [8-18]: Rear surface (where contacting with E-ring) • “SA, Open Guide U” [8-11]: 2 holes for the “Shaft, Sensor Adjust” [8-16] • “SA, Open Guide L” [8-22]: 2 holes for the “Shaft, Sensor Adjust” [8-16] 6. Remove the “SA, Open Guide L” [8-22]. 1) Remove 2 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x5) [8-29] and detach the “Holder, Sensor L” [8-25]. 2) Peel off the “Sheet, Sensor Adjust” [8-15] and “Sheet, Sensor Adjust L” [8-32], and remove the “Cover, RFID” [8-21] from the “SA, Open Guide L” [8-22]. Note on reassembling: • Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the following points (refer to the places marked with in Drawing No. 8 “Unit, Sensor Adjust” for the Printer Part in Chapter 5 “Parts List”): • “SA, Open Guide L” [8-22]: 2 holes for the “Shaft, Sensor Adjust” [8-16] 3-25 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-12. Unit, Frame Ribbon L 1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-8. Unit, Mechanism. 2. Remove 1 screw (1PH, M3x6) and detach the “Cover, Ribbon” from the Frame Ribbon L block. 3. Open the head block by pushing the head open lever and remove 1 screws (2PH (SW+PW), M3x5). 4. Close the head block and remove 3 screws (3PH (SW+PW), M3x5). 5. On the left side, release the lock of the Bushing (24400670) by turning its end after pushing the protrusion “A” with tweezers pointing tip, and then detach the Bushing (24400670), “ Shaft, Ribbon Guide FF”, and the Bushing (24400680). 6. Lift the front side of the Frame Ribbon L block and turn it in the direction shown by the arrow, and then detach it upwardly. 7. Remove the “Spring, Shaft Guide FF” and “SA, Front Tension Arm” from the “Unit, Mechanism”. For disassembling parts of the “SA, Front Tension Arm”, refer to “3-5-13. Disassembling the “SA, Front Tension Arm””. Bushing (24400670) A Shaft, Ribbon Guide FF Bushing (24400680) (Frame Ribbon L Block) 3 Unit, Frame Ribbon L Cover, Ribbon 3 1 2 Spring, Shaft Guide FF SA, Front Tension Arm CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-26 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication Notes on reassembling: When reassembling the “Unit, Frame Ribbon L”, follow the next steps. 1. While pushing down the Ribbon Guide Roller C, insert the shaft “B” of the Frame Ribbon L block into the hole “C” of the “Unit, Frame Rear”. (Frame Ribbon L Block) Unit, Frame Rear C B Ribbon Guide Roller C B 3-27 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 2. While tilting the Frame Ribbon L block to the left (outer ward) a little, engage the “SA, Front Tension Arm” with the “SA, Frame Ribbon R” (arrow 1). At the same time, hook the “Spring, Guide Shaft FF” on the “SA, Front Tension Arm”. Be sure that both ends of the spring are correctly hooked as shown in the enlarged illustration. 3. Next, engage the left side of the “SA, Front Tension Arm” with the Frame Ribbon L block (arrow 2). 4. Assemble the Bushing (24400680), “Shaft, Ribbon Guide FF” and Bushing (24400670). For Bushing (24400670), lock its end by turning it so that the protrusion “A” is seated securely. ) ! " # $ $ % $ & ! " CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-28 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-13. Disassembling the “SA, Front Tension Arm” To remove the “SA, Front Tension Arm”, refer to "3-5-12. Unit, Frame Ribbon L. 1. Release the lock of the right side Bushing (24400670) [4-4]. 2. Remove the Bushing (24400670) [4-4], “Spring, Shaft Guide FM” [4-5], “Washer, Shaft Guide FM” [4-6], “Shaft, Ribbon Guide FM” [4-3] and Bushing (24400680) [4-2] from the “SA, Front Tension” [4-1]. 3-5-14. Disassembling the “SA, Frame Ribbon R” To remove the “SA, Frame Ribbon R”, refer to Step 6 in "3-5-9. Each Unit on the “Unit, Mechanism" 1. Pull out 2 “Holder, Ribbon Shaft” [6-1] upwardly after releasing their locks. 2. Remove the “Knob, Ribbon Unit” [6-2] and “Plate, Ribbon Frame” [6-4] from the “Frame, Ribbon R” [6-3], after releasing their claws. 3-5-15. Disassembling the “Unit, Frame Rear” To remove the “Unit, Frame Rear”, refer to Step 7 in "3-5-9. Each Unit on the “Unit, Mechanism". 1. Release the lock of the left side Bushing (24400670) [5-1]. 2. Remove the Bushing (24400670) [5-1], Ribbon Guide Roller E [5-2] and Bushing (24400680) [5-3] from the “SA, Frame Rear” [5-4]. 3. Remove 1 screw (PH (SW+PW), M3x5) [5-11] and detach “SA, Plate Stopper Rear” [5-6]. Then, detach the Ribbon Guide block and the Rear Arm Spring [5-5]. 4. Remove 4 screws (FT, M3x6) [5-12] and detach all other parts (Side Plate L [5-7], Side Plate R [5-10], 4 Bushings (24400680) [5-3], 2 Ribbon Guide Rollers C [5-8] and Beam [5-9]). Note on reassembling: • Insert the ends of Rear Arm Spring [5-5] into the hole of the “SA, Frame Rear” and the Side Plate L block as shown below. After assembling it, be sure to check that the spring is correctly hooked by swinging the Side Plate L block. SA, Frame Rear Rear Arm Spring (Side Plate L Block) 3-29 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-16. Disassembling the “Unit, Frame U” To remove the “Unit, Frame U”, refer to Step 8 in "3-5-9. Each Unit on the “Unit, Mechanism". 1. Remove the “SA, Gear Plate” [3-4]. 1) Unhook the Gear Plate Spring [3-3] from the “SA, Gear Plate” [3-4]. 2) Disengage 3 E-rings (E-Ring, 3) [3-23] and, from the “SA, Gear Plate” [3-4], remove 2 Idle Gear A Sub Assemblies [3-1], 1 Idle Gear B Sub Assembly [3-2], 3 Polysliders [3-29] and 2 Polysliders 1 [3-22]. Note on reassembling: • Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the following points (refer to the places marked with in Drawing No. 3 “Unit, Frame U” for the Printer Part in Chapter 5 “Parts List”): • Idle Gear A Sub Assembly [3-1]: Gear surface • Idle Gear B Sub Assembly [3-2]: Gear surface 2. Bow the Offset Spring [3-13] (which ends are inserted into the frame) and remove it from the frame. Note on reassembling: • Correctly set the Offset Spring [3-13] since the shape of its ends differs. 3. Slide the Head Plate [3-12] backward to remove it. Then the “Spring, Head R” [3-15] and “Spring, Head L” [3-8] will come off. 4. Remove the following parts from the Head Plate [3-12]. 1) Cut the Wire Tie [3-7], remove 1 screw (BH (N), M4x4) [3-26] and 1 washer (EXT, T (N), 4) [3-27], and detach the “SA, Head Cable” [3-6] and the “SA, Head Earth Cable” [3-32]. 2) Remove the Head Earth Plate [3-11] and 1 screw (PH (TP) M3x8) [3-28] and peel off the “Sheet, Cover Cable” [3-10] from the Head Plate [3-12]. 5. Remove the Slider [3-14]. 1) Turn the Adjust Screw [3-17] counterclockwise until the nut (Nut, M3) [3-25] comes off. 2) Then, remove the Slider [3-14], Adjust Screw [3-17] and Curved Washer [3-16]. 6. Remove the “Lever, Head Up” [3-19]. 1) Disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 2) [3-24] and remove 1 Polyslider Washer [3-20], “Lever, Head Up” [3-19] and Open Lever Spring [3-18]. 7. Remove the “SA, Frame U” [3-5]. 1) Remove the Nylon Screw [3-21], Head Balance Seal [3-9] and labels ([3-30] and [3-31]). Note on reassembling: • Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the “SA, Frame U” [3-5] (refer to the places marked with in Drawing No. 3 “Unit, Frame U” for the Printer Part in Chapter 5 “Parts List”). CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-30 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-17. Disassembling the “Unit, Frame” To remove the “Unit, Frame”, refer to Step 9 in "3-5-9. Each Unit on the “Unit, Mechanism" 1. Remove the “SA, Sensor U” (Fixed type) [9-7]. 1) Remove 1 screw (PH (SW+PW), M3x6) [9-34] and remove the “SA, Sensor U” (Fixed type) [9-7]. 2. Remove the “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Fixed type) [9-18]. 1) Remove 1 screw (No. 0, FHT (BT#1), M2x8) [9-36] and detach the “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Fixed type) [9-18]. 3. Remove the Paper Guide [9-8]. 1) While pushing the Paper Guide Spring [9-17], remove it from the hook of the Paper Guide [9-8]. Then, remove the Friction Cork [9-16] and the Paper Guide [9-8]. 4. Remove the “Unit, Motor” [9-38]. 1) On the left lower of the “Unit, Mechanism”, remove 3 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x5) [9-32] and detach the Motor block and “Belt, Motor Drive” [9-12]. 2) Disconnect the “SA, PF MTR Cable” [9-30] from the Motor block, remove 2 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x6) [9-33], and detach the ”Bracket, Motor” [9-6] from the “Unit, Motor” [9-38]. Note on reassembling: • Adjust the belt tension of the “Belt, Motor Drive” [9-12]. Refer to “3-6-2. Belt Tension Adjustment”. 5. Remove the “Unit, Roller Platen” [9-1]. 1) Remove 1 screw (BH, M3x5K) [9-34] and detach the “Cover, Pulley” [9-9]. 2) Push the lever of the “Plate, Tension” [9-28] downward and remove the “Belt, Platen Drive” [9-2], then detach the “Unit, Roller Platen” [9-1] by lifting it upwardly. Note: For easier disassembly procedure, refer to “3-5-2. Unit, Roller Platen. 6. Remove the “SA 1, Drive Shaft” [9-13]. 1) Remove 2 screws (HSS (KCP), M3x5) [9-25] and detach the “Pulley, Drive Shaft” [9-24] and “Bushing, Motor Drive” [9-23]. 2) Pull out the “SA 1, Drive Shaft” [9-13] to the left and remove the 2 “Bearing, Drive Shaft” [9-14]. 7. Remove the Idle Gear Sub Assembly [9-15]. 1) Disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 3) [9-36] and remove the Idle Gear Sub Assembly [9-15]. 8. Remove the “Plate, Peel” [9-11]. 1) Remove 1 screw (PH (SW+PW), M3x6) [9-33] and detach the “Plate, Peel” [9-11]. 3-31 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 9. Remove the Tension Pulley [9-26]. 1) Disengage the Tension Spring [9-29] from the Tension Plate block. 2) Disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 3) [9-36] and pull out the Tension Plate block to the right. 3) Disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 2) [9-37], pull out the Tensioner Pin [9-27], and remove the Tension Pulley [9-26] from the “Plate, Tension” [9-28]. Notes on reassembling: • Correctly hook the Tension Spring [9-29]. (Refer to Drawing No. 9 “Unit, Frame” in Chapter 5 “Parts List”). • Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the Tensioner Pin [9-27] (refer to the places marked with in Drawing No. 9 “Unit, Frame” for the Printer Part in Chapter 5 “Parts List”). 10. Remove the “SA, Connect PCB” [9-20] (CL-S700/CL-S703). 1) Disconnect the “SA, Option Cable 1” [9-21] (J15) and “SA, Option Cable 2” [9-22] (J16) from the “SA, Connect PCB” [9-20]. 2) Remove 2 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x6) [9-33] and detach the “SA, Connect PCB” [9-20]. 11. Remove the “SA, Frame Center” [9-19]. 1) Remove 4 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x6) [9-33] and detach the “SA, Frame Center” [9-19] from the “SA, Frame” [9-10]. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-32 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5-18. Disassembling the Rewinder Part (CL-S700R Only) Disassembly procedures for the Rewinder part of CL-S700R are explained here. [Parts to be lubricated] When the following parts are replaced or reassembled, apply grease (Floil G-311S). The places to be lubricated are indicated with the mark in the drawings for the Rewinder Part (the latter half) of Chapter 5 “Parts List”. Drawing No. 2 “Unit, Rewinder”: • ”Shaft, Measure Sensor” [2-1]: Both ends of the shaft (2 places) • ”Shaft, Damper” [2-6]: Both ends of the shaft (2 places) • “SA, Rewinder Motor” [2-8]: Contacting surface with the “Guide, Motor Plate” [2-10] (1 place) • “Guide, Motor Plate” [2-10]: Back surface (1 place) • “Shaft, Handle Plate” [2-24]: Both ends of the shaft (2 places) • “Plate, Handle” [2-28]: Both holes for the “Shaft, Handle Plate” [2-24] (2 places) • “SA, Handle Link” [2-29]: Both studs (2 places) • “Frame, Door L” [2-33]: “Shaft, Door” [2-40] (1 place) • “Frame, Door R” [2-43]: “Shaft, Door” [2-40] (1 place) • “Holder, Door Shaft R” [2-44]: Hole for “Shaft, Door” [2-40] (1 place) Drawing No. 3 “SA1, Peeler”: • “Roller, Idle Rewinder” [3-1]: Both ends of the shaft (2 places) • “Bush, Idle” [3-2]: Right side (2 places) • “Roller, Friction” [3-6]: Both ends of the shaft (2 places) • “Plate, Sensor Holder” [3-8]: Rear surface at both ends where circled with a dotted line (2 places) Drawing No. 4 “SA2, Peeler”: • “Roll, Peel” [4-1]: Both ends of the shaft (2 places) 3-33 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication (1) Separating the Rewinder part 1. Open the top cover. 2. Remove 1 screw (PH, M3x12) and detach the Top Cover Guide. 3. Remove 2 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x5) and detach the “SA, Ope-pane” frontward. 4. Disconnect the “Cable, Ope-pane FFC” from the “SA, Ope-pane”. Note on reassembling: • Insert the “Cable, Ope-pane FFC” with its blue tape facing up. 5. Remove 1 screw (BH, M3x5K) and 1 screw (PH (SW+PW), M3x5), and detach the “SA, Front Right”. 6. Remove 2 screw (PHT (#2), M3x6) from the front and 2 screws (BH, M3x5) from the rear side. (Top Cover) BH, M3x5 PH, M3x12 PH (SW+PW), M3x5 Cable, Ope-pane FFC Guide, Top Cover BH, M3x5K SA, Ope-pane PHT (#2), M3x6 PH (SW+PW), M3x5 SA, Front Right CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-34 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 7. Fully slide the Printer part to the rear. Then, each claw of the Rewinder part comes off the slit on the Printer part. 8. Lift the Printer part and disconnect 2 cables (J15 and J16) from the connectors (J501 and J502) of the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. Tips: To disconnect the cables easier, you can carefully put the Printer part on the Rewinder part widthwise. (Printer Part) Slits(6 pcs.) Claws (6 pcs.) J15 (Rewinder Part) J16 J502 J501 SA, Rewinder PCB 9. Remove the Printer part and place it so as not to damage the cables at the bottom. The following is an example where spacers (not supplied) are used. Cables (Printer Part) Spacer Spacer 3-35 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication (2) Removing the Rewinder Mechanism block 1. Remove 2 screws (1PH (SW+PW), M3x5) and detach the “Case, Rewinder Front L” upwardly. 2. Remove 1 screw (2PH (SW+PW), M3x5) and detach the “Case, Rewinder Front R” upwardly. 3. Remove 1 screw (3PH (SW+PW), M3x5) and detach the “Plate, Torque Limiter”. 4. Disengage 1 E-ring (4E-Ring, 4), pull out “Pin, Parallel(A), M2x12” (5), and fully move the Door Shaft block to the right. Then, pull out the Torque Limiter to the left. Note on reassembling: • The Torque Limiter can turn in one way only. 5. Disconnect 2 cables from the connectors J503 and J504 of the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. Note on reassembling: • Run the cables as shown in the figure. 6. Remove 7 screws (6PH (SW+PW), M3x5) and detach the Rewind Mechanism block upwardly. 1 Case, Rewinder Front L 6 6 3 Plate, Torque Limiter Torque Limiter (Door Shaft Block) E-Ring, 4 4 Pin, Parallel(A), M2x12 5 J504 J503 2 Case, Rewinder Front R (Rewinder Mechanism Block) SA, Rewinder PCB CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-36 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication (3) Removing the “Door, Rewinder” and “SA1, Peeler” 1. Remove the Rewinder Mechanism block referring to above “(2) Removing the Rewinder Mechanism block”. Note: To remove the “Door, Rewinder” alone, it is not necessary to detach the Rewinder Mechanism block. You can remove it after opening the Rewinder cover. 2. Remove 4 screws (PHT (#2), M3x6) and detach the “Frame2, Door Center”. 3. Remove 4 screws (PHT (#2), M3x6) and detach the Handle and Rewinder Door. Note on reassembling: • When attaching the “Door, Rewinder”, run the Peel sensor cable along the door frame as shown in the figure (See the “Cable path”). 4. Remove 2 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x5) and detach the “SA1, Peeler”. Note on reassembling: • Pass the cable (J503) through the left opening “A” as shown in the figure. PH (SW+PW), M3x5 SA1, Peeler PHT (#2), M3x6 PHT (#2), M3x6 Frame2, Door Center Door, Rewinder PHT (#2), M3x6 (Cable path) Handle A (To J504) (Cable path) (To J503) 3-37 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication (4) Removing the “SA, Peel Sensor”/Friction Roller/Idle Rewinder Roller 1. Remove the “SA1, Peeler” referring to above “(3) Removing the “Door, Rewinder” and “SA1, Peeler””. 2. Remove 2 screws (1BH, M3x5) and detach the “Plate, Friction Peeler”. Then, the edges “A” of “Plate, Friction Link” on both sides are set free as they come off the slits “B”, and both “Plate, Friction Link” become loose. 3. Remove 2 “Bush, Friction” (2) and detach the “Roller, Friction”. 4. Remove 2 screws (3PH, M2x3) and detach the “SA, Peel Sensor”. 5. Remove 3 “Bush, Idle” (4), 1 “Bush, Friction” (2), 2 “Plate, Friction Link”, “Spring, R Friction” and “Spring, L Friction”, and detach the “Roller, Idle Rewinder”. 6. Disengage 1 E-ring (6E-Ring, 2) from the “Roller, Idle Rewinder”. 7. Remove 2 screws (7PH (SW+PW), M3x5) and detach the “Plate, Sensor Holder” from the “Plate1, Peeler”. Roller, Idle Rewinder 6 Spring, L Friction 5 Plate, Sensor Holder 7 Plate, Friction Link 4 Plate1, Peeler 2 A 4 2 A’ 1 Spring, R Friction Roller, Friction Plate, Friction Peeler SA, Peel Sensor 3 Notes on reassembling: • Distinguish the “Spring, L Friction” from “Spring, R Friction” referring to above figure. The former is longer than the latter. • Securely insert the edges “A” of the “Plate, Friction Link” into the slits “B”. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-38 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication (5) Removing the “SA, Rewinder Motor” 1. Remove the Rewinder Mechanism block referring to “(2) Removing the Rewinder Mechanism block”. 2. Remove 2 screws (PHT (#2), M3x6) and detach the “Guide, Motor Plate”. 3. Unhook the “Spring, Rewinder Motor”, disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 3), remove 1 screw (PH (SW+PW), M3x5), and detach the “Pivot, Rewinder Motor Plate”. 4. While pushing down the Measure Flap block, remove the “SA, Rewinder Motor” to the right. Pivot, Rewinder Motor Plate SA, Rewinder Motor Guide, Motor Plate E-Ring, 3 Spring, Rewinder Motor PHT (#2), M3x6 PH (SW+PW), M3x5 (Measure Flap Block) Note on reassembling: • After assembling the “SA, Rewinder Motor” on the frame, be sure that it can smoothly turn. (The pivot is the supporting point of the “SA, Rewinder Motor”.) 3-39 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication (6) Removing the “SA, Interlock SW” 1. Remove the Rewinder Mechanism block referring to “(2) Removing the Rewinder Mechanism block”. 2. Disconnect the cable of the “SA, Interlock SW” from the “SA, Rewinder Motor”. 3. Remove 2 screws (PH (PW), M2x10) and detach the “Plate, Nut” and the “SA, Interlock SW”. Plate, Nut SA, Interlock SW Connector of the SA, Rewinder Motor PH (PW), M2x10 Note on reassembling: • Horizontal long hole is provided for mounting the lower side of the “SA, Interlock SW”. When assembling the “Plate, Nut”, be sure that the lower side of screw is at the center of the long hole as shown in the figure. Plate, Nut Long hole CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-40 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication (7) Removing Rollers Note: The parts location Nos. (e.g. [2-61]) show the ones for CL-S700R. Refer to the Drawing No. 2 “Unit, Rewinder” for the Rewinder Part in Chapter 5 “Parts List”. (7-1) Measure Sensor Rollers (4 pcs.) 1. Remove the Rewinder Mechanism block referring to “(2) Removing the Rewinder Mechanism block”. 2. Disengage 2 E-rings (E-Ring, 3) [2-61] on both sides and pull out the “Shaft, Damper” [2-6] to remove 4 “Roller, Measure Sensor” [2-7]. (7-2) Damper Roller (3 pcs.) of the Rewinder Cover block 1. Open the Rewinder Cover. 2. Disengage 2 E-rings (E-Ring, 3) [2-61] on both sides and pull out the “Shaft, Damper” [2-6] to remove 3 “Roller, Damper” [2-22]. (7-3) Damper Roller (4 pcs.) of the Rewinder Mechanism block 1. Remove the Rewinder Door referring to “(3) Removing the “Door, Rewinder” and “SA1, Peeler””. 2. Disengage 2 E-rings (E-Ring, 3) [2-61] on both sides and pull out the “Shaft, Guide Roller ”[2-21] to remove 4 “Roller, Damper” [2-22]. (7-4) Peel Roll on the Printer part 1. Open the Rewinder Cover. 2. Remove 2 screws (PH (SW+PW), M3x5) [1-49] and detach the “SA2, Peeler” [1-45]. 3. Disengage 1 E-ring (E-Ring, 4) [4-9], remove the “Bushing2, Peel Roller” [4-8], and pull out the “Roll, Peel” [4-1]. (8) Removing “SA, Rewinder PCB” Note: The parts location Nos. (e.g. [2-59]) show the ones for CL-S700R. Refer to the Drawing No. 2 “Unit, Rewinder” for the Rewinder Part in Chapter 5 “Parts List”. 1. Remove 4 connectors (J501, J502, J503 and J504) from the “SA, Rewinder PCB” [2-59]. 2. Remove 4 screws (PH (PW+SW), M3x5) [2-64] and detach the “SA, Rewinder PCB” [2-59]. 3-41 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication (9) Notes on assembling the springs Note: The parts location Nos. (e.g. [2-2]) show the ones for CL-S700R. Refer to the Drawing No. 2 “Unit, Rewinder” for the Rewinder Part in Chapter 5 “Parts List”. The following figure shows the places where the springs should be assembled. Assemble each spring correctly referring to the figure. • “Spring, Measure Sensor L” [2-2] • “Spring, Measure Sensor R“ [2-3] • “Spring, Damper Rewinder L“ [2-23] • “Spring, Damper Rewinder R“ [2-25] • “Spring, Handle R“ [2-27] Spring, Measure Sensor R Spring, Measure Sensor L [Location of each spring] Spring, Damper Rewinder L Spring, Damper Rewinder R Spring, Handle R CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-42 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments 3-6. Adjustments 3-6-1. Transparent/Reflective Sensor Position Adjustment When you replace one of the following parts, perform both sensor position adjustment and sensor sensitivity adjustment.” • ”SA, Main PCB” • ”SA, Sensor U” (Fixed type) • ”SA, Sensor Bottom” (Fixed type) • ”SA, Sensor U” (Adjustable type) • ”SA, Sensor Bottom” (Adjustable type) (1) Sensor position adjustment (Factory mode) After entering Factory mode, adjust the following submenu items: • Fix-Thru Pos (When “SA, Sensor U” (Fixed type) or “SA, Main PCB” is replaced.) • Fix-Refl Pos (When “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Fixed type) or “SA, Main PCB” is replaced.) • Adj-Thru Pos (When “SA, Sensor U” (Adjustable type) or “SA, Main PCB” is replaced.) • Adj-Refl Pos (When “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Adjustable type) or “SA, Main PCB” is replaced.) For details, refer to “2-3-4. Factory/Service mode” in Chapter 2. (2) Sensor sensitivity adjustment (Factory mode) Caution - DO NOT adjust other submenus that are not explained here since the submenus in Factory mode are essential items that can affect to the printing accuracy, etc. - Do not turn OFF the power of the printer until you finish the adjustment. If it is turned OFF, you need to repeat the adjustment from the beginning. - The value adjusted here is retained until you change it with the same procedure. Even if you perform initialization by selecting “Test Mode” main menu, “Factory Default” submenu and “Yes”, the changed value is not returned to the initial value set at the factory. Perform sensitivity adjustment for each sensor with the following submenu. Submenu Adjust when the following part is replaced. Init Fix-Thru ”SA, Sensor U” (Fixed type) or ”SA, Main PCB” Init Fix-Refl ”SA, Sensor Bottom” (Fixed type) or ”SA, Main PCB” Init Adj-Thru ”SA, Sensor U” (Adjustable type) or ”SA, Main PCB” Init Adj-Refl ”SA, Sensor Bottom” (Adjustable type) or ”SA, Main PCB” Refer to (2-1) (2-2) (2-3) (2-4) Refer to “2-3-4. Factory/Service mode” in Chapter 2 for menu operation in Factory mode. 3-43 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments (2-1) Init Fix-Thru sensitivity adjustment Init Fix-Thru sensor is the transparent sensor (fixed type), i.e. “SA, Sensor U” (Fixed type). Preparation: 1. Prepare recommended media or media to be used. 2. Peel off labels from the liner. 3. Open the head block and the sensor arm, and then set the media. 4. Be sure that the media is put on the “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Fixed type). If the media has black mark, avoid that area. 5. Close the sensor arm and the head block. Procedure: 1. Enter Factory/Service mode by turning on the power while pressing and holding the [MENU], [FEED] and [STOP] keys. “Factory Setup” main menu appears. 2. In “Factory Setup” main menu, press the [STOP] (X) key to enter Factory Setup mode. The first submenu “Sens Vol Adj.” appears. 3. Press the [MENU] (T) key until “Init Fix-Thru” submenu appears. S Factory SetupT Init Fix-Thru W Exit Enter X 4. Press the [STOP] (X) key to enter Init Fix-Thru sensitivity adjustment mode. S W Init Fix-Thru T No Exit Enter X 5. Press the [MENU] (T) key to select “Exec”. S W Init Fix-Thru T Exec Exit Enter X 6. Press the [STOP] (X) key to execute adjustment. Adjustment starts and the following screen is display. (Media is not fed.) S W Now !! T Executing Exit Enter X CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-44 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments 7. Be sure that adjustment is successfully completed and the following screen is displayed. (The value “123” is an example.) S W Finished T DAC 123 Exit Enter X When adjustment failed: “Cannot Setup” is displayed. In this case, follow the next steps. S Cannot T 1) Press any key of the printer. Setup The screen returns to that in Step 3. 2) Check for correct media setting position, media, active Enter X W Exit sensor (Sensor Select menu is set to “Front Fixed Sen”), etc. and repeat from Step 3. 8. Press any key of the printer. Then, the obtained value is saved into the printer and the screen returns to Step 3. 9. To continue other adjustment, proceed to the desired item ((2-2), (2-3) or (2-4)). To terminate adjustment, go to the next step. 10. Press the [PAUSE] (W) key to return to “Factory Setup” menu. 11. Press the [PAUSE] (W) key once again. The changed value is stored in the printer and the printer is turned OFF and then ON for normal operation. 3-45 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments (2-2) Init Fix-Refl sensitivity adjustment Init Fix-Refl sensor is the reflective sensor (fixed type), i.e. “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Fixed type). Preparation: Open the head block and the sensor arm, and then set label with black mark or tag with black mark. When label with black mark is used: 1. Prepare recommended media or media to be used. 2. Peel off labels from the liner. 3. Set the media and be sure that the media is put on the “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Fixed type) (avoid the black mark area). 4. Close the sensor arm and the head block. When tag with black mark is used: 1. Prepare recommended media or media to be used. 2. Set the media (if continuous tag is used, set it) and be sure that the media is put on the “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Fixed type) (avoid the black mark area). 3. Close the sensor arm and the head block. Procedure: 1. Enter Factory/Service mode by turning on the power while pressing and holding the [MENU], [FEED] and [STOP] keys. “Factory Setup” main menu appears. 2. In “Factory Setup” main menu, press the [STOP] (X) key to enter Factory Setup mode. The first submenu “Sens Vol Adj.” appears. 3. Press the [MENU] (T) key until “Init Fix-Refl” submenu appears. S Factory SetupT Init Fix-Refl W Exit Enter X 4. Press the [STOP] (X) key to enter Init Fix-Refl sensitivity adjustment mode. S W Init Fix-Refl T No Exit Enter X 5. Press the [MENU] (T) key to select “Exec”. S W Init Fix-Refl T Exec Exit Enter X CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-46 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments 6. Press the [STOP] (X) key to execute adjustment. Adjustment starts and the following screen is display. (Media is not fed.) S W Now !! T Executing Exit Enter X 7. Be sure that adjustment is successfully completed and the following screen is displayed. (The value “123” is an example.) S W Finished T DAC 123 Exit Enter X When adjustment failed: “Cannot Setup” is displayed. In this case, follow the next steps. S Cannot T 1) Press any key of the printer. Setup The screen returns to that in Step 3. 2) Check for correct media setting position, media, active Enter X W Exit sensor (Sensor Select menu is set to “Front Fixed Sen”), etc. and repeat from Step 3. 8. Press any key of the printer. Then, the obtained value is saved into the printer and the screen returns to Step 3. 9. To continue other adjustment, proceed to the desired item ((2-1), (2-3) or (2-4)). To terminate adjustment, go to the next step. 10. Press the [PAUSE] (W) key to return to “Factory Setup” menu. 11. Press the [PAUSE] (W) key once again. The changed value is stored in the printer and the printer is turned OFF and then ON for normal operation. 3-47 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments (2-3) Init Adj-Thru sensitivity adjustment Init Adj-Thru sensor is the transparent sensor (adjustable type), i.e. “SA, Sensor U” (Adjustable type). Preparation: 1. Prepare recommended media or media to be used. 2. Peel off labels from the liner. 3. Open the head block and the sensor arm, and then set the media. 4. Be sure that the media is put on the “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Adjustable type). If the media has black mark, avoid that area. 5. Close the sensor arm and the head block. Procedure: 1. Enter Factory/Service mode by turning on the power while pressing and holding the [MENU], [FEED] and [STOP] keys. “Factory Setup” main menu appears. 2. In “Factory Setup” main menu, press the [STOP] (X) key to enter Factory Setup mode. The first submenu “Sens Vol Adj.” appears. 3. Press the [MENU] (T) key until “Init Adj-Thru” submenu appears. S Factory SetupT Init Adj-Thru W Exit Enter X 4. Press the [STOP] (X) key to enter Init Adj-Thru sensitivity adjustment mode. S W Init Adj-Thru T No Exit Enter X 5. Press the [MENU] (T) key to select “Exec”. S W Init Adj-Thru T Exec Exit Enter X 6. Press the [STOP] (X) key to execute adjustment. Adjustment starts and the following screen is display. (Media is not fed.) S W Now !! T Executing Exit Enter X CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-48 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments 7. Be sure that adjustment is successfully completed and the following screen is displayed. (The value “123” is an example.) S W Finished T DAC 123 Exit Enter X When adjustment failed: “Cannot Setup” is displayed. In this case, follow the next steps. S Cannot T 1) Press any key of the printer. Setup The screen returns to that in Step 3. 2) Check for correct media setting position, media, active Enter X W Exit sensor (Sensor Select menu is set to “Rear Adj Sensor”), etc. and repeat from Step 3. 8. Press any key of the printer. Then, the obtained value is saved into the printer and the screen returns to Step 3. 9. To continue other adjustment, proceed to the desired item ((2-1), (2-2) or (2-4)). To terminate adjustment, go to the next step. 10. Press the [PAUSE] (W) key to return to “Factory Setup” menu. 11. Press the [PAUSE] (W) key once again. The changed value is stored in the printer and the printer is turned OFF and then ON for normal operation. 3-49 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments (2-4) Init Adj-Refl sensitivity adjustment Init Adj-Refl sensor is the reflective sensor (adjustable type), i.e. “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Adjustable type). Preparation: Open the head block and the sensor arm, and then set label with black mark or tag with black mark. When label with black mark is used: 1. Prepare recommended media or media to be used. 2. Peel off labels from the liner. 3. Set the media and be sure that the media is put on the “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Adjustable type) (avoid the black mark area). 4. Close the sensor arm and the head block. When tag with black mark is used: 1. Prepare recommended media or media to be used. 2. Set the media (if continuous tag is used, set it) and be sure that the media is put on the “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Adjustable type) (avoid the black mark area). 3. Close the sensor arm and the head block. Procedure: 1. Enter Factory/Service mode by turning on the power while pressing and holding the [MENU], [FEED] and [STOP] keys. “Factory Setup” main menu appears. 2. In “Factory Setup” main menu, press the [STOP] (X) key to enter Factory Setup mode. The first submenu “Sens Vol Adj.” appears. 3. Press the [MENU] (T) key until “Init Adj-Refl” submenu appears. S Factory SetupT Init Adj-Refl W Exit Enter X 4. Press the [STOP] (X) key to enter Init Adj-Refl sensitivity adjustment mode. S W Init Adj-Refl T No Exit Enter X 5. Press the [MENU] (T) key to select “Exec”. S W Init Adj-Refl T Exec Exit Enter X CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-50 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments 6. Press the [STOP] (X) key to execute adjustment. Adjustment starts and the following screen is display. (Media is not fed.) S W Now !! T Executing Exit Enter X 7. Be sure that adjustment is successfully completed and the following screen is displayed. (The value “123” is an example.) S W Finished T DAC 123 Exit Enter X When adjustment failed: “Cannot Setup” is displayed. In this case, follow the next steps. S Cannot T 1) Press any key of the printer. Setup The screen returns to that in Step 3. 2) Check for correct media setting position, media, active Enter X W Exit sensor (Sensor Select menu is set to “Rear Adj Sensor”), etc. and repeat from Step 3. 8. Press any key of the printer. Then, the obtained value is saved into the printer and the screen returns to Step 3. 9. To continue other adjustment, proceed to the desired item ((2-1), (2-2) or (2-3)). To terminate adjustment, go to the next step. 10. Press the [PAUSE] (W) key to return to “Factory Setup” menu. 11. Press the [PAUSE] (W) key once again. The changed value is stored in the printer and the printer is turned OFF and then ON for normal operation. 3-51 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments 3-6-2. Belt Tension Adjustment Belt tension adjustment is necessary in the following case. - When the “Unit, Motor” is replaced. 1. Remove the screw “B” and loosely tighten the Motor block with 2 screws “A”. 2. Push the left side of the Motor block with the tip of the spring gauge as shown in the figure. 3. Push it so that the spring gauge reads the following value. 600 to 1000 gf. 4. Tighten the Motor block with 2 screws “A” and the screw “B”. [Spring Gauge] * Use Max. 2000gf gauge. [Left side view of the “Unit, Mechanism”] Belt, Motor Drive Motor Block Spring Gauge A A B CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-52 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments 3-6-3. Ribbon Skew Adjustment This adjustment may be necessary in the following case. - When the “Unit, Head” is replaced Normally, ribbon wrinkles can be removed by adjusting the adjust screws of the “Unit, Ribbon Frame L”. (Refer to the figure on the right.) If ribbon wrinkles cannot be removed with these screws, perform the ribbon skew adjustment as follows: [On the left side of the Unit, Frame Ribbon L] TENSION STANDARD LOW TENSION STANDARD LOW SUPER LOW Adjust screw for Supply side ribbon tension adjustment Adjust screw for Take-up side ribbon tension adjustment Ribbon skew adjustment procedure: Remove ribbon wrinkle by moving the right end (movable end) of the Head Spacer Shaft (a part of the “Unit, Head”) as follows: (Left end is a fixed end.) 1. Loosen (not remove) the screw “A” of the Head Spacer Shaft. 2. Turn the lever “B” clockwise or counterclockwise to move the right side end of the Head Spacer Shaft forward or backward to remove ribbon wrinkles. Refer to the figure below. Also, refer to the figure on the next page to understand the ribbon skew adjustment mechanism. 3. After adjustment, tighten the screw “A”. * 3-53 ) CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments 3-6-4. Ribbon Tension Adjustment Perform the ribbon tension adjustment when the “Unit, Frame Ribbon L” is replaced with new one. Preparation: Make a “Ribbon-tension adjust ribbon” and “Ribbon-tension spring adjust ribbon” to be used in the adjustment procedure. Diameter of ribbons should be 60mm and 80mm, respectively. Reinforce the ribbon end with paper or the like and punch a hole in the center as shown in the figure. As shown in the figure, stick a tape inside the “Ribbon-tension spring adjust ribbon (φ80mm)” at about 150mm from the edge. (This tape acts to prevent the weight hooked on the ribbon hole from falling to the floor. Without the tape, you cannot perform adjustment properly.) [Ribbon-tension adjust ribbon] [Ribbon-tension spring adjust ribbon] Tape mm mm 0 φ8 0 φ6 m 0m 15 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-54 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments Adjustment procedure: 1. Remove the “SA, Ope-Pane”, “SA, Front Right” and “SA, Front Center” from the main body. Refer to “3-5-8. Unit, Mechanism”. 2. Open the head block by pushing the head open lever and remove the “Unit, Head”. Refer to “3-5-1. Unit, Head. 3. Remove the Ribbon Cover of the “Unit, Frame Ribbon L” form the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-12. Unit, Frame Ribbon L. 4. Ribbon Tension Check/Adjustment on Take-up Side: 1) Set the “Adjust screw for Take-up side ribbon tension adjustment” to “STANDARD” position. 2) Set the “Ribbon-tension adjust ribbon (φ60mm)” to the take-up side ribbon holder. 3) Hook a spring gauge of 500gf on the “Ribbon-tension adjust ribbon” and slowly pull the ribbon end downward at a constant speed (approx. 7.5cm/sec. or so). Then, check if the reading of the spring gauge in the steady state is within 450 +/- 50gf. If the reading is in the specified range, no tension adjustment is required on take-up side. Proceed to step 5 “Ribbon Tension Check/Adjustment on Supply Side”. If not, proceed to the next sub step. [Take-up side adjustment] Adjust screw "A" (For Service) When weak When stronge TENSION STANDARD LOW N RD Adjust screw for Take-up side ribbon tension adjustment Ribbon-tension adjust ribbon (φ60mm) 450 +/− 50gf 3-55 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments 4) Detach the “Ribbon-tension adjust ribbon (φ60mm)” once and then remove the Ribbon Tension Spring Block from the “Unit, Frame Ribbon L” by removing the screw “B”. After that, reset the “Ribbon-tension adjust ribbon (φ60mm)”. (Ribbon Tension Spring Block) B Unit, Frame Ribbon L 5) With the spring gauge of 500gf hooked on the “Ribbon-tension adjust ribbon”, repeat above sub step 3) and be sure that the reading of the spring gauge is within 450 +/- 50gf. If the reading is in the specified range, proceed to sub step 9). If not, proceed to the next sub step. 6) Refer to the figure in sub step 3) and apply ThreeBond 1401B to the Adjust screw “A” after removing it. Then, loosely tighten the Adjust screw “A” with a hex wrench and leave the hex wrench on the Adjust screw “A”. 7) While repeating above sub step 3), adjust the position of Adjust screw “A” by moving hex wrench up and down so that the reading of spring gauge is within 450 +/- 50gf. Note: If tension is weak, move the Adjust screw “A” upward. If it is strong, move the Adjust screw “A” downward. 8) After completion of adjustment, tighten the Adjust screw “A”. 9) Loosen (do not remove) the two screws “C” of the Ribbon Tension Spring Block to set the Ribbon Tension Spring free. (Ribbon Tension Spring Block) C Ribbon Tension Spring CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-56 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments 10) Hook a weight of 450g on the “Ribbon-tension spring adjust ribbon (φ80mm)”. The Front Belt Plate moves and stops at a certain position where it balances with the weight. Plate, Front Belt Ribbon-tension spring adjust ribbon (φ80mm) 450g 11) Mount the Ribbon Tension Spring Block and set the Ribbon Tension Spring so that no gap is found between the Front Belt Plate. Then, apply ThreeBond 1401B to the screws “C” and tighten the screws “C”. Notes: • Do not move the Front Belt Plate. • When tightening the screws “C”, pay special attention so as not to turn the Ribbon Tension Spring. • Be sure that the Ribbon Tension Spring is fully contact with the Front Belt Plate. Ribbon Tension Spring Apply ThreeBond 1401B. C (Ribbon Tension Spring Block) Plate, Front Belt 3-57 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments 12) Remove the “Ribbon-tension spring adjust ribbon (φ80mm)” and reset the “Ribbon-tension adjust ribbon (φ60mm)”. 13) Hook a spring gauge of 500gf on the “Ribbon-tension adjust ribbon (φ60mm)” and slowly pull the ribbon end downward at a constant speed (approx. 7.5cm/sec. or so). Then, check if the reading of the spring gauge in the steady state is within 450 +/- 50gf. If the reading is out of the specified range, repeat above sub steps 4) through 11). 5. Ribbon Tension Check/Adjustment on Supply Side: 1) Set the “Adjust screw for Supply side ribbon tension adjustment” to “STANDARD” position. 2) Set the “Ribbon-tension adjust ribbon (φ60mm)” to the supply side ribbon holder. 3) Hook a spring gauge of 500gf on the “Ribbon-tension adjust ribbon” and horizontally pull the ribbon end toward you at a constant speed (approx. 7.5cm/sec. or so). When the ribbon is drawn approx. more than 20cm, suddenly load applies to the spring gauge. With this load condition, check if the reading of the spring gauge is within 400 +/50gf. [Supply side adjustment] Adjust screw "D" (For Service) When strong TENSION STANDARD When weak LOW SUPER LOW Adjust screw for Supply side ribbon tension adjustment Ribbon-tension adjust ribbon (φ60mm) 400 +/- 50gf Approx. 20cm 4) If the reading is in the specified range, no tension adjustment on supply side is required. In this case, proceed to step 6. If not, proceed to the next sub step. 5) Apply ThreeBond 1401B to the Adjust screw “D” after removing it. Then, loosely tighten the Adjust screw “D” with a hex wrench and leave the hex wrench on the Adjust screw “D”. 6) While repeating above sub step 3), adjust the position of Adjust screw “D” by moving hex wrench up and down so that the reading of spring gauge is within 400 +/- 50gf. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 3-58 Chapter 3 Disassembly and Maintenance 3-6. Adjustments Note: If tension is weak, move the Adjust screw “D” downward. If it is strong, move the Adjust screw “D” upward. 7) Tighten the Adjust screw “D”. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 3 in the reverse order to assemble the removed parts. 3-59 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 4 Troubleshooting CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Table of Contents 4-1. Error Message and Corrective Actions ........................................................................... 4-3 4-2. Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 4-5 4-2-1. Problems in Powering Up the Printer ................................................................. 4-5 4-2-2. Media-feed Problems ......................................................................................... 4-6 4-2-3. Problems in Printing ........................................................................................... 4-7 4-2-4. Ribbon-feed Problem ......................................................................................... 4-8 4-2-5. Sensor Problems................................................................................................ 4-9 4-2-6. Operation Panel Problems ................................................................................. 4-13 4-2-7. Rewinder Problems (CL-S700R Only) ............................................................... 4-14 (1) Rewinding problem (CL-S700R Only) ....................................................... 4-14 (2) Rewinder sensor problem (CL-S700R Only) ............................................. 4-15 4-2-7. Connector Location .............................................................................................. 4-16 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 4-2 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-1. Error Message and Corrective Actions 4-1. Error Message and Corrective Actions When an error occurs, the error condition will be displayed on the operation panel. The ERROR LED flashes and the LCD shows the error contents. In case of error, the printer enters off line except for the following errors. LCD: Alarm Head Hot LCD: Alarm PFMotor Hot LCD: Alarm Cutter Hot Causes/Corrective Actions Head temperature - high temperature abnormality • Printing stops temporarily. Wait until the thermal head gets cool. Head temperature - low temperature abnormality • Printing is impossible. Start printing after the thermal head becomes warm. PF motor temperature abnormality • Printing stops temporarily. Wait until the motor gets cool. Fan motor malfunction • Remove obstacle, if any. • Firmly connect the cable (J12 on “SA, Main PCB”). • Replace the “SA, Fan”. Cutter motor temperature abnormality (Option) • Cutting action stops temporarily. Wait until the cutter motor gets cool. Head open • Close the head. Paper end • Add media. Paper out (paper position undetectable) • Incorrect Adjustable Sensor positioning: Correct the sensor position to match the sensor position with the label/tag’s black mark. • Incorrect Media mode menu: Match the Media mode menu (e.g. SeeThrough) and media to be used. ERROR LED Flashing LCD Alarm Head Hot Flashing Error Head Cold Flashing Alarm PFMotor Hot Flashing Error Fan Lock Flashing Alarm Cutter Hot Flashing Error Head Open Error Paper End Error Paper Load Flashing Flashing (to be continued) • Incorrect sensor adjustment against media to be used: Enter sensor adjustment mode While pressing [MENU], [FEED] and [STOP] 4-3 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-1. Error Message and Corrective Actions Causes/Corrective Actions keys, turn on the power, and then perform sensor adjustment. For details, refer to 2-3-4 “(3) How to change the settings in Factory mode” in Chapter 2. Paper jam • Remove the jammed media. Head low resistance value abnormality • Due to defective thermal element: Printing quality will degrade. Ribbon end • Install a new ribbon. Communication error • Receiving buffer overrun error Communication error • Parity error Communication error • Framing error Cover open • Close the printer cover. Auto-cutter abnormality (foreign object etc.) • Jamming, etc. Rewinder cover open (CL-S700R only) • Close the rewinder cover. Rewinder full (CL-S700R only) • Remove the wound media from the rewinder flange. Rewinder failure (CL-S700R only) • Does not rewind, etc. Rewinder motor temperature abnormality (CL-S700R only) • Rewinding stops temporarily. Wait until the motor gets cool. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 4-4 ERROR LED LCD Flashing Error Paper Jam Alarm Head Check Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Error Ribbon End Error Serial Over Run Error Serial Parity Error Serial Framing Error Cover Open Error Cutter Fail Error Rewind Open Error Rewind Full Error Rewind Fail Alarm Rewinder Hot Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting The following tables show possible remedies for various symptoms that might occur. Symptoms are given in the left column, and the corresponding remedies in the right column. Notes: 1. When parts are replaced, refer to Chapter 3 "Disassembly and Maintenance". 2. Connectors (J . . .) given in the column of checks and remedies are connected with the “SA, Main PCB”. For the location of each connector, refer to “4-2-7. Connector Location". 4-2-1. Problems in Powering Up the Printer Symptoms No power to the printer Checks Remedies 1. Is the Power Cord loosely connected to the AC outlet or the AC inlet of the printer? 1. Connect it firmly. 2. Check voltage on the input power line. Acceptable supply voltage: 100 to 240V (-10%+6%) 2. Supply correct voltage. 3. Is the fuse F1 on the “Unit, Power Supply” blown? 3. Replace with new fuse. If new fuse is also blown when power is turned on with the connector J11 disconnected from the “SA, Main PCB”, the “Unit, Power Supply” is faulty and must be replaced. Notes: - Do not replace the fuse with the power switch turned on. - The fuse is provided to prevent fire, and damage to the “Unit, Power Supply”. When replacing it, use the same rating and type. 4. Is the connector of “SA, Power SW Cable” firmly connected to the “Unit, Power Supply” (CN1)? 4. Connect it firmly. 5. Is the “SA, Power Cable” firmly connected between the “Unit, Power Supply” and the “SA, Main PCB” (J11)? 5. Connect it firmly. 6. Is the Ope-pane Cable connected between the “SA, Main PCB” (J14) and the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB” firmly? If it is not connected or is inserted upside down, no LED lights up and nothing appears on the LCD even if you turned ON the power. 6. Connect it firmly. 7. Failure in the power supply circuit. 7. Replace the “Unit, Power Supply”. 4-5 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting 4-2-2. Media-feed Problems Symptoms No media feed Irregular media feed pitch Media jamming Checks Remedies 1. Is the connector of the “SA, PF MTR Cable” firmly connected to the “Unit, Motor”? 1. Connect it firmly. 2. Is the connector J4 for the “Unit, Motor” connected firmly? 2. Connect it firmly. 3. Is the connector J11 for “Unit, Power Supply” connected firmly? 3. Connect it firmly. 4. Is +24V supplied to pins 7, 8, 9 and 10 of J11? 4. Replace the “Unit, Power Supply”. 5. Failure in the control circuit or in the paper feed motor driver. 5. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. 6. Does the “Unit, Motor” work? 6. Replace the “Unit, Motor”. 1. Is the connector J4 for PF motor connected firmly? 1. Connect it firmly. 2. Is dust or other foreign matter on the platen? 2. Remove dust or foreign matter. 3. Does the media feed mechanism work smoothly? 3. Check, clean and lubricate mechanical parts. Note: Refer to Chap. 3 "Disassembly and Maintenance". 4. Failure in the control circuit or in the paper feed motor driver. 4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. 1. Is media set correctly? 1. Set media correctly. 2. Is the media being used within manufacturer's specifications? 2. Use media within manufacturer's specifications. 3. Check the media feed mechanism and media path for dust or other foreign matter. 3. Remove dust or foreign matter. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 4-6 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting 4-2-3. Problems in Printing Symptoms No print Poor printing Checks Remedies 1. Is the head block securely closed? 1. Close the head block correctly. 2. Is the thermal head over heated? In this case, the LCD indicates “Alarm Head Hot”. 2. Wait until the thermal head gets cool. Printing resumes automatically. 3. Is the PF motor over heated? In this case, the LCD indicates “Alarm PFMotor Hot”. 3. Wait until the PF motor gets cool. Printing resumes automatically. 4. Is the interface cable firmly connected between the printer and the host? 4. Connect it firmly. 5. Is the Centro cable firmly connected between the “Unit, Centro PCB” (CN101) and the “SA, Main PCB” (J17)? 5. Connect it firmly. 6. Is the “SA, Head Cable” firmly connected between the “Unit, Head” and the “SA, Main PCB” (J3)? 6. Connect it firmly. 7. Does the transparent/reflective sensor detect presence of media? 7. To check, see “4-2-5. Sensor Problems". 8. Is +24V supplied to pins 7, 8, 9 and 10 of J11? 8. Replace the “Unit, Power Supply”. 9. Is the thermal head temperature too low? In this case, the LCD indicates “Error Head Cold”. 9. If the printer is cold, wait until it gets warm. Otherwise, replace the “Unit, Head”. 10. “Unit, Head” is broken. 10. Replace the “Unit, Head” . 11.Failure in the head driver circuit. 11.Replace the “Unit, Head” . 12. Failure in the control circuit. 12. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. 1. Thermal head is dirty. 1. Clean it with the head cleaner provided. 2. Thickness adjustment is improper. 2. Adjust the media thickness adjustment screw to suit to the media thickness being used. 3. Is +24V supplied to pins 7, 8, 9 and 10 of J11? 3. Replace the “Unit, Power Supply”. 4-7 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting Symptoms Uneven print density Checks Remedies 1. Head balance is improper. Uneven print density may appear either on the right side or the left side. 1. Adjust the media width adjustment knob to suit to the media width being used. 4-2-4. Ribbon-feed Problem Symptoms Ribbon is not fed at all, or is not fed correctly. Checks Remedies 1. Is the ribbon correctly inserted into the ribbon holders? 1. Insert the ribbon correctly. 2. Is the ribbon path correct? 2. Install the ribbon correctly. 3. Does the ribbon slack on the supply side during back feeding? 3. Adjust the supply side ribbon tension by turning the adjust screw with a flat-bladed screwdriver. 4. Does the ribbon slack on the take-up side during printing? 4. Adjust the take-up side ribbon tension by turning the adjust screw with a flat-bladed screwdriver. [On the left side of the Unit, Frame Ribbon L] TENSION STANDARD LOW TENSION STANDARD LOW SUPER LOW Adjust screw for Supply side ribbon tension adjustment Ribbon wrinkles occur. Adjust screw for Take-up side ribbon tension adjustment 1. Is proper ribbon tension applied to both supply and take-up side? 1. Adjust ribbon tension to suit to the width of ribbon being used with the Adjust screw for Supply/Take-up side ribbon tension adjustment. 2. Is printing density proper? 2. Set the printing density to an appropriate value by using the menu or control software. 3. Head pressure does not match the media width (ribbon width) being used. 3. Adjust the head pressure with the media width adjustment knob. 4. Angle of the head spacer shaft of the Head Unit is not proper. 4. Adjust the head spacer shaft angle appropriately. Refer to “3-6-3. Ribbon Skew Adjustment” in Chapter 3. (continued) CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 4-8 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting Symptoms Ribbon wrinkles occur. Checks Remedies 5. Has the “Unit, Frame Ribbon L” been replaced with new one? 1. Is proper ribbon tension applied to both Ribbon tends to slip supply and take-up side? on media. (May occur faint printing, displacement of printing position, dirty printing, etc.) 5. Perform the ribbon tension adjustment. Refer to “3-6-4. Ribbon Tension Adjustment” in Chapter 3. 1. Adjust ribbon tension to suit to the type and width of media. Printing continues even when ribbon runs out. 1. Is the Print Method menu set to "DT" (Direct Thermal) for thermal media printing? 1. Change the Print Method menu to "TT (Thermal Transfer)". Ribbon slants. 1. Is the ribbon correctly inserted into the ribbon holders? 1. Insert the ribbon correctly. 2. Is the ribbon path correct? 2. Install the ribbon correctly. 4-2-5. Sensor Problems Symptoms Checks Remedies 1. Is the connector of the “SA, Cover Top cover is open, Open Sens” firmly connected to “SA, but cover open status Ope-pane PCB” (J403)? is not detected (LCD does not show “ Error 2. Cover open sensor is defective. Cover Open”). (Cover open sensor problem) 3. Failure in the ope-pane circuit. Head block is closed, but the LCD shows “Error Head Open”. (Head up sensor problem) 1. Connect it firmly. 2. Replace the “SA, Cover Open Sens”. 3. Replace the “SA, Ope-pane PCB”. 4. Replace the in the control circuit. 4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. 1. Is the connector of the “SA, Head Up SW” firmly connected to “SA, Main PCB” (J9)? 1. Connect it firmly. 2. Head up sensor is defective. 2. Replace the “SA, Head Up SW”. 3. Failure in the control circuit. 3. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. 4-9 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting Symptoms Ribbon end is not correctly detected. Label on liner or notch of tag is not detected. (Transparent sensor problem) Or Paper end is not detected. Checks Remedies 1. Is the connector of the ribbon encoder in the “Unit, Frame Ribbon L” firmly connected to the “SA, Main PCB” (J8)? 1. Connect it firmly. 2. Ribbon encoder is defective. 2. Replace the “Unit, Frame Ribbon L”. After replacement, perform ribbon tension adjustment referring to “3-6-4. Ribbon Tension Adjustment” in Chapter 3. 3. Failure in the control circuit. 3. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. 1. Is the Media Sensor menu setting correct? 1. Set it to “See Through”. 2. Is the Adjustable Sensor positioned to an appropriate position where label or notch of tag can be detected? (When adjustable sensor is to be used) By default, the Sensor Select menu is set to “Rear Adj Sensor” and the Adjustable Sensor is selected”. 2. Move the Adjustable Sensor by turning the adjustable sensor position knob. 3. Is the sensor adjustment performed against media to be used? 3. Perform the sensor adjustment for user. See “Sensor Adjustment for user (Transparent Sensor/ Reflective Sensor)” on the next page. 4. Is the following connector of the “SA, Sensor U” firmly connected to the “SA, Main PCB”? For Adjustable Sensor: J7 For Front Fixed Sensor: J6 4. Connect it firmly. 5. Is the following connector of the “SA, Sensor Bottom” firmly connected to the “SA, Main PCB”? For Adjustable Sensor: J22 For Front Fixed Sensor: J21 5. Connect it firmly. 6. Is dust on the LED of the Transparent/ Reflective Sensor? 6. Clean the LED to remove dust. 8. Failure in the Transparent Sensor or the 8. Replace the “SA, Sensor U” or the “SA, Sensor Bottom”. Reflective Sensor. 9. Failure in the control circuit. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 4-10 9. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting [Sensor Adjustment for user (Transparent Sensor/Reflective Sensor)] The following describes the transparent and reflective sensor adjustment method (for user) for both adjustable sensor and the front fixed sensor. This method is stated in “Sensor Adjustments and Calibration” of the User’s Manual. Preparation: Transparent sensor: 1. Peel off labels from the liner. 2. Open the head block and the sensor arm, and set the media on the “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Adjustable type) or “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Fixed type). If the media has black mark, avoid that area. 3. Close the sensor arm and the head block. Reflective sensor: When label with black mark is used 1. Peel off labels from the liner. 2. Open the head block and the sensor arm, and set the media on the “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Adjustable type) or “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Fixed type). If the media has black mark, avoid that area. 3. Close the sensor arm and the head block. When tag with black mark is used 1. Open the head block and the sensor arm, and set the media (if continuous tag is used, set it) on the “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Adjustable type) or “SA, Sensor Bottom” (Fixed type). Avoid the black mark area. 2. Close the sensor arm and the head block. Sensor Adjustment Procedure: 1. Turn on the power while pressing and holding the [PAUSE], [FEED] and [STOP] keys. “Sensor Cal Mode See Through (or Reflect)” is displayed on the LCD. (To switch between “See Through” and “Reflect”, press and release the [STOP] key while pressing and holding the [MENU] key. 2. Press and release the [PAUSE] key while pressing and holding the [MENU] key. “Sensor Cal Mode Executing” and then “Sensor Cal Mode Succeeded” will be displayed on the LCD. (If adjustment stops abnormally (adjustment impossible), the ERROR LED flashes and "Failed" is displayed.) 3. Press the [STOP] key. Then the printer turns off and then on again, and enters the normal operation. 4-11 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting Symptoms Black mark on tag is not detected. (Reflective sensor problem) Or Paper end is not detected. Checks Remedies 1. Is the Media Sensor menu correct? 1. Set it to “Reflect”. 2. Is the Adjustable Sensor positioned to an appropriate position where a black mark on tag can be detected? (When adjustable sensor is to be used) 2. Move the Adjustable Sensor by turning the adjustable sensor position knob so that it is set to the center of black mark. 3. Is the sensor adjustment is performed against media to be used? 3. Perform the sensor adjustment for user. See “Sensor Adjustment for user (Transparent Sensor/ Reflective Sensor)” on the next page. 4. Is the following connector of the “SA, Sensor Bottom” firmly connected to the “SA, Main PCB”? For Adjustable Sensor: J22 For Front Fixed Sensor: J21 4. Connect it firmly. 5. Is dust on the LED or phototransistor of the Reflective Sensor? 5. Clean the LED/phototransistor to remove dust. 6. Failure in the Reflective Sensor. 6. Replace the “SA, Sensor Bottom”. 7. Failure in the control circuit. 7. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 4-12 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting 4-2-6. Operation Panel Problems Symptoms LED does not light. No key works. Nothing appears on the LCD. Checks Remedies 1. Is the Ope-pane FFC Cable connected between the “SA, Main PCB” (J14) and the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB” firmly? 1. Connect it firmly. 2. Is the Ope-pane FFC Cable inserted upside down? 2. Insert it in the correct direction. 3. Failure in the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB”. 3. Replace the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB”. 4. Failure in the control circuit. 4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. 1. Is the Ope-pane Cable connected between the “SA, Main PCB” (J14) and the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB” firmly? 1. Connect it firmly. 2. Is the Ope-pane FFC Cable inserted in the correct direction? 2. Insert it in the correct direction. 3. Failure in the ope-pane circuit. 3. Replace the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB”. 4. Failure in the control circuit. 4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. 1. Is the Ope-pane Cable connected between the “SA, Main PCB” (J14) and the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB” firmly? 1. Connect it firmly. 2. Is the Ope-pane FFC Cable inserted in the correct direction? 2. Insert it in the correct direction. 3. On the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB”, is the LCD FPC firmly inserted into the connector J402? 3. Connect it firmly. 4. Failure in the ope-pane circuit. 4. Replace the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB”. 5. Failure in the control circuit. 5. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. 4-13 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting 4-2-7. Rewinder Problems (CL-S700R Only) (1) Rewinding problem (CL-S700R Only) Symptoms Does not rewind. Label is peeled but rewinding operation does not pause. Checks Remedies 1. Is the rewinder cover opened? In this case, the LCD indicates “Error Rewinder Open”. 1. Close the rewinder cover. 2. Is the rewinder full? In this case, the LCD indicates “Error Rewinder Full”. 2. Remove the wound media from the rewinder flange. 3. Is the rewinder motor over heated? In this case, the LCD indicates “Alarm Rewinder Hot”. 3. Wait until the rewind motor gets cool. Rewinding resumes automatically. 4. Are cables J15 and J16 (“SA, Main PCB”) connected to J501 and J502 (“SA, Rewinder PCB”) firmly? 4. Connect them firmly. 5. Is the connector of the “SA, Rewinder Motor” connected to J504 of the “SA, Rewinder PCB” firmly? 5. Connect it firmly. 6. Is the connector of the “SA, Interlock SW” connected to “SA, Rewinder Motor” firmly? In this case, the LCD indicates “Error Rewinder Open”. 6. Connect it firmly. 7. Failure in the “SA, Rewinder Motor”. 7. Replace the “SA, Rewinder Motor”. 8. Failure in the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. 8. Replace the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. 9. Failure in the control circuit. 9. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. 1. Is the peel sensor cable connected to JP503 of the “SA, Rewinder PCB” firmly? 1. Connect it firmly. 2. Failure in the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. 2. Replace the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. 3. Failure in the control circuit. 3. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 4-14 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting (2) Rewinder sensor problem (CL-S700R Only) Symptoms Checks Remedies 1. Rewinder cover sensor (“SA, Interlock SW”) is defective. 1. Replace the “SA, Interlock SW”. 2. Failure in the “SA, Rewinder Motor”. 2. Replace the “SA, Rewinder Motor”. 3. Failure in the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. 3. Replace the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. 4. Failure in the control circuit. 4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. 1. Failure of photo interrupter PS701of the “SA, Rewinder Motor”. 1. Replace the “SA, Rewinder Motor”. 2. Failure in the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. 2. Replace the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. 3. Failure in the control circuit. 3. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. Rewind Full status is not detected or rewinding speed is not properly controlled. 1. Failure of photo interrupter PS501/ PS502 of the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. 1. Replace the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. 2. Failure in the control circuit. 2. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. Peeled label is not detected. 1. Failure of Peel Sensor. 1. Replace the “SA, Peel Sensor”. 2. Failure in the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. 2. Replace the “SA, Rewinder PCB”. 3. Failure in the control circuit. 3. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. Rewinder cover is closed, but rewinder cover open status is detected. (LCD shows “Error Rewinder Open”.) Rewinder motor rotation is not detected. (LCD shows “Error Rewinder Fail”.) 4-15 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting 4-2-7. Connector Location [SA, Main PCB] Ribbon Encoder (Ribbon Running Sensor/Ribbon End Sensor) SA, Head Up SW (Head Up Sensor) Adjustable Sensor (Transparent sensor) SA, Main PCB Front Fixed Sensor (Transparent sensor) J7 J6 Front Fixed Sensor (Reflective sensor) J9 J8 J16 SA, Connect PCB (J803) (CL-S700/CL-S703) SA, Rewinder PCB (J502) (CL-S700R) 1 J22 J21 Adjustable Sensor (Reflective sensor) J12 J11 SA, Fan 10 J14 J5 J3 J15 SA, Connect PCB (J801) (CL-S700/CL-S703) SA, Rewinder PCB (J501) (CL-S700R) J4 Ope-Pane FFC Cable Unit, Head (Blue Tape) Unit, Motor (Thermistor) Unit, Motor Unit, Power Supply [Unit, Centro PCB] CN101 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 4-16 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 4-2. Troubleshooting [SA, Rewinder PCB] (For CL-S700R) SA, Peel Sensor SA, Rewinder Motor J503 J504 SA, Main PCB (J15) PS501 PS502 SA, Main PCB (J16) J501 J502 4-17 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 5 Parts Lists CHAPTER 5 PARTS LISTS Note: The Parts Lists section consists of the following two parts: Former half: For CL-S700 and CL-S703 Latter half: For CL-S700R (Common parts with the printer upper area are to be referred to the former half.) CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 5 Parts Lists Chapter 5 Parts Lists for CL-S700/CL-S703 Table of Contents Recommended Spare Parts List .............................................................................................. 5-3 Drawing No. 1 Parts List & Location for General Assembly ............................................... 5-5 Drawing No. 2 Parts List & Location for Unit, Mechanism.................................................. 5-10 Drawing No. 3 Parts List & Location for Unit, Frame U ...................................................... 5-14 Drawing No. 4 Parts List & Location for SA, Front Tension Arm ........................................ 5-18 Drawing No. 5 Parts List & Location for Unit, Frame Rear................................................. 5-21 Drawing No. 6 Parts List & Location for SA, Frame Ribbon R ........................................... 5-24 Drawing No. 7 Parts List & Location for SA, Base Guide Open ......................................... 5-27 Drawing No. 8 Parts List & Location for Unit, Sensor Adjust.............................................. 5-30 Drawing No. 9 Parts List & Location for Unit, Frame.......................................................... 5-34 Drawing No. 10 Parts List & Location for Unit, Top Cover.................................................... 5-39 Drawing No. 11 Parts List & Location for SA, Ope-pane...................................................... 5-42 Drawing No. 12 Parts List & Location for SA, Front Center ................................................. 5-45 Drawing No. 13 Parts List & Location for SA, Front Right.................................................... 5-48 Drawing No. 14 Parts List & Location for Unit, PCB............................................................. 5-51 Drawing No. Parts List & Location for Accessories ......................................................... 5-54 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-2 Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Recommended Spare Parts List Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 5-3 1 Date Dec. 15, 2010 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 Item No. Location Part No. TITLE: Recommended Spare Parts List Q'ty/ Unit Part Name Maint. Class Worn Casual Sheet No. 1/1 Rev. No. 1 Remarks | 1 1-15 JN66801-0 Unit, Power Supply 1 2 2-8-1 JN09802-0 Unit, Head 1 | For CL-S700/CL-S700R (Rev. No.1) 3 2-8-2 JN09804-0 Unit, Head (300DPI) 1 | For CL-S703 (Rev. No.1) 4 8-9 JN48704-0 SA, Sensor U 1 | Adjustable type 5 8-24 JN48705-0 SA, Sensor Bottom 1 | Adjustable type 6 9-1 JN28801-0 Unit, Roller Platen 1 | 7 9-39 JN25801-0 Unit, Motor 1 | 8 9-7 JN48701-0 SA, Sensor U 1 | Fixed type 9 9-18 JN48702-0 SA, Sensor Bottom 1 | Fixed type 10 14-2-1 JN66701-0 SA, Main PCB (200) 1 | For CL-S700 (Rev. No.1) 11 14-2-2 JN66702-0 SA, Main PCB (300) 1 | For CL-S703 (Rev. No.1) 12 14-2-3 JN66718-0 SA, Main PCB (200R) 1 | For CL-S700R (Rev. No.1) 13 14 15 16 17 18 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-4 @ Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 1 Parts List & Location for General Assembly Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 5-5 Date 1/3 0 Apr. 18, 2008 2/3 0 Apr. 18, 2008 3/3 0 Apr. 18, 2008 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 1 General Assembly (Rev. 0) For CL-S700/CL-S703 5-6 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: General Assembly Sheet No. 1/3 Drawing No. 1 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 1-1 Roll Holder JE99090-0 1 1-2 Flange, Paper Wide JM79201-0 1 1-3 Unit, Top Cover 1-4 ---- 1 Cover, Hinge JN56209-0 2 1-5 Holder, Paper Shaft Left JN56116-0 1 1-6 SA, Cover Inner Power JN56704-0 1 1-7 SA, Ribbon Holder JM34710-1 2 1-8 Stopper, Hinge JN54103-0 2 1-9 SA, Hinge JN59905-0 2 1-10 Unit, Mechanism JN99801-0 1 1-11 Cover, Inner Paper JN56112-0 1 1-12 Unit, PCB - 1 1-13 Sheet 1, Power Protect JN54910-0 1 1-14 Plate, Power JN64101-0 1 1-15 Unit, Power Supply JN66801-0 1 1-16 Cover, Cable JN56201-0 1 1-17 SA, Power Cable JN67706-0 1 1-18 Cable, Ope-pane FFC JN67901-0 1 1-19 WS-2NS (Cable, Clamp) JN59903-0 3 1-20 SA, Fan JN65901-0 1 5-7 Remarks @ 24600730 Ref: Drawing No. 10 Ref: Drawing No. 2 Ref.: Drawing No. 14 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: General Assembly Sheet No. 2/3 Drawing No. 1 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit Remarks 1-21 SA, Power SW Cable JN67709-0 1 1-22 Rail, Guide U JN54906-0 1 1-23 Rail, Guide Base JN54907-0 1 1-24 Guide, Top Cover JN54202-0 1 1-25 Sheet, Case L JN54106-0 1 1-26 SA, Ope-pane JN56705-0 1 Ref.: Drawing No. 11 1-27 SA, Front Center JN56708-0 1 Ref.: Drawing No. 12 1-28 SA, Front Right JN56707-0 1 Ref.: Drawing No. 13 1-29 SA, Case L JN56701-1 1 1-30 Leg, Case JN56901-0 4 1-31 Plate, Cable Cover JN56113-0 1 1-32 Cover, Sensor Adjust JN56115-0 1 1-33 Holder, Paper Shaft Right JN56117-0 1 1-34 Cover, Inner PCB Front JN56110-0 1 1-35 SA, Cover Inner PCB Rear JN56713-0 1 1-36 Screw, FH, M3.0x6 E00230-060F 2 1-37 Screw, BH, M3.0x5 E00530-050F 19 1-38 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M3.0x5 E04030-050F 15 1-39 Screw, BH, M3.0x5K E00530-050KF 13 1-40 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M4.0x30 E00940-300F 4 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-8 Including Inlet @ Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: General Assembly Sheet No. 3/3 Drawing No. 1 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 1-41 Screw, FH, M3.0x6 E00230-060F 2 1-42 Screw, PH, M3.0x12 E00130-120F 1 1-43 Screw, BH (N), M4.0x4 E00540-040WF 1 1-44 Washer, EXT, T (N), 4 E50740-000WF 1 5-9 Remarks @ CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 2 Parts List & Location for Unit, Mechanism Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. CL-S700/CL-S703 5-10 Date 1/2 2 Dec. 15, 2010 2/2 1 Jan. 15, 2009 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 2 Unit, Mechanism (Rev. 1) For CL-S700/CL-S703 Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the places marked with . 2-22 2-19 2-22 2-20 2-21 2-1 (DRW NO.3) 2-6 (DRW NO.4) 2-4 2-22 2-2 2-3 2-25 2-22 2-7 2-23 2-8-1 2-8-2 2-22 2-5 (DRW NO.5) (DRW NO.6) 2-22 2-9 (DRW NO.7) 2-22 2-14 2-15 2-24 2-13 2-16 2-17 2-10 2-22 2-11 2-22 (DRW NO.8) 2-12 2-22 2-18 (DRW NO.9) 5-11 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: Unit, Mechanism Sheet No. 1/2 Drawing No. 2 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 2 Q'ty/ Unit Remarks 2-1 Bushing JE99704-0 1 2-2 Shaft, Ribbon Guide FF JN32001-0 1 2-3 Bushing JE99705-0 1 24400680 2-4 SA, Front Tension Arm JN34704-0 1 Ref: Drawing No. 4 2-5 Unit, Frame Rear JN44803-0 1 Ref: Drawing No. 5 2-6 Unit, Frame U JN44802-0 1 Ref: Drawing No. 3 2-7 Spring, Head Up JN13601-0 1 2-8-1 Unit, Head JN09802-0 1 For CL-S700/CL-S700R (Rev. No.2) 2-8-2 Unit, Head (300DPI) JN09804-0 1 For CL-S703 (Rev. No.2) 2-9 SA, Frame Ribbon R JN34703-0 1 Ref: Drawing No. 6 2-10 SA, Base Guide Open JN44712-0 1 Ref: Drawing No. 7 2-11 Ground Brush JE99438-0 1 33000340 2-12 Unit, Sensor Adjust JN44804-0 1 Ref: Drawing No. 8 2-13 Sheet 2, Power Protect JN54911-0 1 2-14 Damper JE99051-0 1 25200890 2-15 Damper Pin JE99023-0 1 22601801 2-16 SA, Head Up SW JN68704-0 1 2-17 Clamp, Main Cable JN59902-0 1 2-18 Unit, Frame ---- 1 Ref: Drawing No. 9 2-19 Unit, Frame Ribbon L JN34801-0 1 (Rev. No. 1) CL-S700/CL-S703 5-12 24400670 @ Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: Unit, Mechanism Sheet No. 2/2 Drawing No. 2 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 1 Q'ty/ Unit 2-20 Cover, Ribbon JN36201-0 1 2-21 Screw, PH , M3.0x6 E00130-060F 1 2-22 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M3.0x5 E04030-050F 11 2-23 Screw, FT, M3.0x6 E00230-060F 2 2-24 Screw, PH, M4x6 E00140-060F 1 2-25 Spring, Shaft Guide FF JN33602-0 1 5-13 Remarks @ (Rev. No. 1) CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 3 Parts List & Location for Unit, Frame U Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. CL-S700/CL-S703 5-14 Date 1/2 0 Apr. 18, 2008 2/2 1 Dec. 15, 2010 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 3 Unit, Frame U (Rev. 1) For CL-S700/CL-S703 3-22 3-3 3-29 3-4 3-1 3-1 Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the places marked with . 3-2 3-23 3-21 3-5 Apply lubricant to other side also. 3-7 3-30 3-31-1 3-31-2 3-8 3-27 3-26 3-10 3-11 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-9 3-16 3-24 3-14 3-6 3-25 3-28 3-32 3-17 3-15 3-12 3-13 5-15 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: Unit, Frame U Sheet No. 1/2 Drawing No. 3 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit Remarks 3-1 Idle Gear A Sub Assembly JE99683-0 2 23205720 3-2 Idle Gear B Sub Assembly JE99684-0 1 23205730 3-3 Gear Plate Spring JE99651-0 1 21903240 3-4 SA, Gear Plate JN29715-0 1 3-5 SA, Frame U JN44706-0 1 3-6 SA, Head Cable JN67707-0 1 3-7 Wire Tie C6701-101# 1 3-8 Spring, Head L JN13603-0 1 3-9 Head Balance Seal JE99434-0 1 3-10 Sheet, Cover Cable JN54908-0 1 3-11 Head Earth Plate JE99117-0 1 20803381 3-12 Head Plate JE99011-0 1 20803370 3-13 Offset Spring JE99016-0 1 21902562 3-14 Slider JE99048-0 1 25200861 3-15 Spring, Head R JN13602-0 1 3-16 Curved Washer JE99065-0 1 90500390 3-17 Adjust Screw JE99192-0 1 92100202 3-18 Open Lever Spring JE99019-0 1 21902601 3-19 Lever, Head Up JN14201-0 1 3-20 Polyslider Washer JE99064-0 1 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-16 25201200 90500380 @ Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: Unit, Frame U Drawing No. 3 Location Part No. Part Name Q'ty/ Unit Sheet No. 2/2 Rev. No. 1 Remarks 3-21 Nyrock Screw JE99066-0 1 3-22 Polyslider 1 JN39902-0 2 3-23 E-Ring, 3.0 E60330-000F 3 3-24 E-Ring, 2.0 E60320-000F 1 3-25 Nut, M3 E40130-000F 1 3-26 Screw, BH (N), M4.0x4 E00540-040WF 1 3-27 Washer, EXT, T (N), 4 E50740-000WF 1 3-28 Screw, PH (TP), M3.0x8 E04230-080F 1 3-29 Polyslider JN39901-0 3 3-30 Label 2, Caution, Head AH90935-0 1 English 3-31-1 Label 7, Caution, Head AR99902-0 1 For CSA/French (Rev. No.1) 3-31-2 Label 6, Caution, Head AR99901-0 1 For CSE/German (Rev. No.1) 3-32 SA, Head Earth Cable JN67712-0 1 5-17 @ 92100220 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 4 Parts List & Location for SA, Front Tension Arm Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-18 0 Date Apr. 18, 2008 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 4 SA, Front Tension Arm (Rev. 0) For CL-S700/CL-S703 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-6 5-19 4-5 4-4 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: SA, Front Tension Arm Sheet No. 1/1 Drawing No. 4 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 4-1 SA, Front Tension JN34701-0 1 4-2 Bushing JE99705-0 1 4-3 Shaft, Ribbon Guide FM JN32002-0 1 4-4 Bushing JE99704-0 1 4-5 Spring, Shaft Guide FM JN33601-0 1 4-6 Washer, Shaft Guide FM JN34107-0 1 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-20 Remarks 24400680 24400670 @ Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 5 Parts List & Location for Unit, Frame Rear Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 5-21 0 Date Apr. 18, 2008 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 5 Unit, Frame Rear (Rev. 0) For CL-S700/CL-S703 5-1 5-2 5-4 5-3 5-12 5-5 5-7 5-6 5-3 5-11 5-8 5-3 5-3 5-9 5-10 5-8 5-3 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-22 5-12 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: Unit, Frame Rear Drawing No. 5 Location Part No. Part Name Q'ty/ Unit Remarks 5-1 Bushing JE99704-0 1 24400670 5-2 Ribbon Guide Roller E JE99710-0 1 25100710 5-3 Bushing JE99705-0 5 24400680 5-4 SA, Frame Rear JN44705-0 1 5-5 Rear Arm Spring JE99650-0 1 5-6 SA, Plate Stopper Rear JN44708-0 1 5-7 Side Plate L JE99639-0 1 20804850 5-8 Ribbon Guide Roller C JE99709-0 2 25100690 5-9 Beam JE99667-0 1 23000680 5-10 Side Plate R JE99640-0 1 20804860 5-11 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M3.0x5 E04030-050F 1 5-12 Screw, FT, M3.0x6 E00230-060F 4 5-23 Sheet No. 1/1 Rev. No. 0 @ 21903231 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 6 Parts List & Location for SA, Frame Ribbon R Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-24 0 Date Apr. 18, 2008 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 6 SA, Frame Ribbon R (Rev. 0) For CL-S700/CL-S703 6-1 6-2 6-4 6-3 5-25 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: SA, Frame Ribbon R Sheet No. 1/1 Drawing No. 6 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 6-1 Holder, Ribbon Shaft JN34201-0 2 6-2 Knob, Ribbon Unit JN34202-0 1 6-3 Frame, Ribbon R JN34104-0 1 6-4 Plate, Ribbon Frame JN36202-0 1 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-26 Remarks @ Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 7 Parts List & Location for SA, Base Guide Open Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 5-27 0 Date Apr. 18, 2008 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 7 SA, Base Guide Open (Rev. 0) For CL-S700/CL-S703 7-3 7-4 7-8 7-1 7-6 7-5 7-7 7-2 7-8 7-1 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-28 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: SA, Base Guide Open Sheet No. 1/1 Drawing No. 7 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 7-1 SA, Damper Shaft JN29703-0 2 7-2 Frame, Damper JN24105-0 1 7-3 E-Ring, 4.0 E60340-000F 1 7-4 Shaft, Damper JN22005-0 1 7-5 Frame, Damper JN24203-0 1 7-6 Spring, Damper L JN23603-0 1 7-7 Spring, Damper R JN23602-0 1 7-8 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M3.0x5 E04030-050F 2 5-29 Remarks @ Metal Plastic CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 8 Parts List & Location for Unit, Sensor Adjust Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. CL-S700/CL-S703 5-30 Date 1/2 0 Apr. 18, 2008 2/2 0 Apr. 18, 2008 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 8 Unit, Sensor Adjust (Rev. 0) For CL-S700/CL-S703 8-1 8-2 Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the places marked with . 8-4 8-26 8-3 8-6 8-27 8-7 8-8 8-5 8-10 8-28 8-9 8-28 8-4 8-12 8-13 8-3 8-11 8-14 8-32 8-30 8-15 8-3 8-4 8-3 8-29 8-19 8-20 8-26 8-16 8-28 8-21 8-29 8-29 8-26 8-18 8-17 8-22 8-31 8-10 8-23 8-24 8-8 8-7 8-26 8-27 8-25 5-31 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: Unit, Sensor Adjust Sheet No. 1/2 Drawing No. 8 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit Remarks 8-1 Open Guide Seal JE99179-0 1 8-2 Cover, Sensor Adjust JN24208-0 1 8-3 Pin, Teeth Spring, 1.2x8 E70412-080F 4 8-4 Screw Gear JE99279-0 3 8-5 Shaft, Screw Sensor U JN22004-0 1 8-6 Position Label JE99281-0 1 71104631 8-7 Stopper Plate JE99275-0 2 20803640 8-8 Move Pin JA99067-0 2 22601080 8-9 SA, Sensor U JN48704-0 1 Adjustable type 8-10 Wire Tie C6701-101# 2 8-11 SA, Open Guide U JN29702-0 1 8-12 Open Guide Lever JN24228-0 1 8-13 Open Guide Lever Spring JE99132-0 1 21902730 8-14 Paper Guide Plate JE99228-0 1 24600781 8-15 Sheet, Sensor Adjust JN54909-0 1 8-16 Shaft, Sensor Adjust JN22001-0 1 8-17 Spring, Guide Sensor Up JN23601-0 1 8-18 Bushing 3, Adjust Sensor JN22201-0 1 8-19 Ratchet Gear JE99280-0 1 8-20 Knob, Sensor Adjust JN24201-0 1 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-32 71104522 24001020 24001030 @ Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: Unit, Sensor Adjust Sheet No. 2/2 Drawing No. 8 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 8-21 Cover, RFID JN24204-0 1 8-22 SA, Open Guide L JN29705-0 1 8-23 Shaft, Screw Sensor L JN22006-0 1 8-24 SA, Sensor Bottom JN48705-0 1 8-25 Holder, Sensor L JN24101-0 1 8-26 E-Ring, 3.0 E60330-000F 4 8-27 Screw, No.0, FHT (BT#1), M2.0x4 E13220-040F 4 8-28 E-Ring, 2.0 E60320-000F 3 8-29 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M3.0x5 E04030-050F 5 8-30 Screw, PH, M3.0x3 E00130-030F 2 8-31 Ratchet Spring JE99276-0 1 8-32 Sheet, Sensor Adjust L JN24901-0 1 5-33 Remarks @ Adjustable type 21902760 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 9 Parts List & Location for Unit, Frame Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. CL-S700/CL-S703 5-34 Date 1/3 1 Dec. 15, 2010 2/3 1 Dec. 15, 2010 2/3 1 Dec. 15, 2010 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 9 Unit, Frame (Rev. 1) For CL-S700/CL-S703 9-40 9-39 Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the place marked with . 9-1 9-30 9-2 9-5 9-31 9-3 9-4 9-38-1 9-38-2 9-33 9-7 9-32 9-34 9-31 9-32 9-33 9-33 9-6 9-8 9-35 9-9 9-10 9-11 9-29 9-16 9-12 9-15 9-13 9-18 9-19 9-27 9-26 9-36 9-17 9-14 9-33 9-23 9-24 9-20 9-37 9-28 9-36 9-25 9-14 9-33 9-33 9-21 9-22 5-35 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: Unit, Frame Sheet No. 1/3 Drawing No. 9 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 1 Q'ty/ Unit Remarks 9-1 Unit, Roller Platen JN28801-1 1 9-2 Belt, Platen Drive JN26902-0 1 9-3 SA, Motor (with thermistor) ---- 1 9-4 Plate, Heat Sink Motor JN24109-0 1 9-5 Flange, Motor ---- 1 9-6 Bracket, Motor JN24108-0 1 9-7 SA, Sensor U JN48701-0 1 Fixed type 9-8 Paper Guide JE99045-0 1 24600660 9-9 Cover, Pulley JN24207-0 1 9-10 SA, Frame JN44701-0 1 9-11 Plate, Peel JN24107-0 1 9-12 Belt, Motor Drive JN26901-0 1 9-13 SA 1, Drive Shaft JN22702-0 1 9-14 Bearing, Drive Shaft JN21901-0 2 9-15 Idle Gear Sub Assembly JE99446-0 1 23204211 9-16 Friction Cork JE99037-0 1 24000910 9-17 Paper Guide Spring JE99017-0 1 21902571 9-18 SA, Sensor Bottom JN48702-0 1 Fixed type 9-19 SA, Frame Center JN44707-0 1 9-20 SA, Connect PCB JN66725-0 1 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-36 (Rev. No.1) Not supplied Not supplied (Not used for CL-S700R) @ Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: Unit, Frame Sheet No. 2/3 Drawing No. 9 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 1 Q'ty/ Unit Remarks 9-21 SA, Option Cable 1 JN67715-0 1 9-22 SA, Option Cable 2 JN67716-0 1 9-23 Bushing, Motor Drive JN22011-0 1 9-24 Pulley, Drive Shaft JN20302-0 1 9-25 Screw, HSS (KCP), M3.0x5 E30130-050F 2 9-26 Tension Pulley JE99154-0 1 2400090 9-27 Tensioner Pin JE99136-0 1 22601891 9-28 Plate, Tension JN24110-0 1 9-29 Tension Spring JE99131-0 1 9-30 SA, PF MTR Cable JN67705-0 1 9-31 Screw, PH, M3.0x6 E00130-060F 2 9-32 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M3.0x5 E04030-050F 3 9-33 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M3.0x6 E04030-060F 10 9-34 Screw, BH, M3.0x5K E00530-050KF 1 9-35 Screw, No.0, FHT (BT#1), M2.0x8 E13220-080F 1 9-36 E-Ring, 3.0 E60330-000F 2 9-37 E-Ring, 2.0 E60320-000F 1 9-38-1 Unit, Motor JN25801-0 1 For CL-S700/CL-S703 (Rev. No.1) 9-38-2 Unit, Motor JN25803-0 1 For CL-S700R (Rev. No.1) 9-39 Gear, One-way JN20201-0 1 (Rev. No.1) 5-37 @ 21902722 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: Unit, Frame Sheet No. 3/3 Drawing No. 9 Location 9-40 Part Name E-Ring, 4.0 CL-S700/CL-S703 Part No. E60340-000F 5-38 Rev. No. 1 Q'ty/ Unit 1 Remarks (Rev. No.1) @ Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 10 Parts List & Location for Unit, Top Cover Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 5-39 0 Date Apr. 18, 2008 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 10 Unit, Top Cover (Rev. 0) For CL-S700/CL-S703 10-1 10-2 10-7 10-6 10-6 10-7 10-3 10-5 10-4 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-40 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: Unit, Top Cover Sheet No. 1/1 Drawing No. 10 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 10-1 SA1, Top Cover JN56710-1 1 10-2 Cover, Front Top JN56207-0 1 10-3 Logo, CITIZEN JN54201-0 1 10-4 Cover, Cutter Blind JN56208-0 1 10-5 Cover, Window JN54101-0 1 10-6 Screw, PHT (#2), M3.0x6 E10130-060F 2 10-7 Spacer Leg, Case U JN56114-0 2 5-41 Remarks @ CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 11 Parts List & Location for SA, Ope-pane Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-42 1 Date Jan. 15, 2009 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 11 SA, Ope-pane (Rev. 1) For CL-S700/CL-S703 11-5 11-10 11-4 11-2 11-1 11-3 11-11 11-11 11-12 11-6 11-7 11-12 11-8 11-9 5-43 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: SA, Ope-pane Sheet No. 1/1 Drawing No. 11 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 11-1 Sheet, Ope-Pane JN54901-0 1 11-2 Cover, Ope-Pane JN56202-0 1 11-3 SA, Cover Open Sens JN68705-0 1 11-4 SA, Ope-Pane PCB JN66704-0 1 11-5 SA, Ope-Pane Plate JN56706-0 1 11-6 Switch, Pause JN56212-0 1 11-7 Switch, Feed JN56211-0 1 11-8 Switch, Menu JN56210-0 1 11-9 Switch, Stop JN56213-0 1 11-10 Cover, LCD JN54102-0 1 11-11 Screw, PHT (#2), M3.0x6 E10130-060F 4 11-12 Screw, BH, M3.0x5 E00530-050F 2 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-44 Remarks @ Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 12 Parts List & Location for SA, Front Center Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 5-45 0 Date Apr. 18, 2008 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 12 SA, Front Center (Rev. 0) For CL-S700/CL-S703 12-4 12-3 12-4 12-2 12-1 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-46 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: SA, Front Center Sheet No. 1/1 Drawing No. 12 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 12-1 Cover, Front Center JN56204-0 1 12-2 Plate, Front Cover JN56121-0 1 12-3 Cover, Front JN56205-0 1 12-4 Screw, PHT (#2), M3.0x6 E10130-060F 4 5-47 Remarks @ CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 13 Parts List & Location for SA, Front Right Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-48 0 Date Apr. 18, 2008 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 13 SA, Front Right (Rev. 0) For CL-S700/CL-S703 13-2 13-3 13-1 5-49 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: SA, Front Right Sheet No. 1/1 Drawing No. 13 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 13-1 Cover, Front Right JN56203-0 1 13-2 Plate, Front Right JN56120-0 1 13-3 Screw, PHT (#2), M3.0x6 E10130-060F 3 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-50 Remarks @ Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. 14 Parts List & Location for Unit, PCB Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 5-51 1 Date Dec. 15, 2010 CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 14 Unit, PCB (Rev. 1) For CL-S700/CL-S703 14-4 14-3 14-1 14-2-1 14-2-2 14-2-3 14-5 14-6 CL-S700/CL-S703 14-7 5-52 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: Unit, PCB Sheet No. 1/1 Drawing No. 14 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 1 Q'ty/ Unit Remarks 14-1 SA, Centro Cable JN67708-0 1 14-2-1 SA, Main PCB (200) JN66701-0 1 For CL-S700 (Rev. No.1) 14-2-2 SA, Main PCB (300) JN66702-0 1 For CL-S703 (Rev. No.1) 14-2-3 SA, Main PCB (200R) JN66718-0 1 For CL-S700R (Rev. No.1) 14-3 SA, Holder I/F JN56711-0 1 14-4 Unit, Centro PCB JM66825-1 1 14-5 Lock Screw (Inch) C6390-054# 2 14-6 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M3.0x5 E04030-050F 2 14-7 Screw, BH, M3.0x5 E00530-050F 2 5-53 @ CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700/CL-S703 Drawing No. Parts List & Location for Accessories Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 CL-S700/CL-S703 5-54 0 Date Apr. 18, 2008 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700/CL-S703 TITLE: Accessories Sheet No. 1/1 Drawing No. Location - Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit Remarks Cord Set (Ul/CSA) C6009-000# 1 For CSA Cord Set (OE Straight) C6009-200# 1 For CSE Cord Set (UK) C6009-300# 1 For CSE CD-ROM, User's Manual JN749** 1 to be revised without notice Guide, Quick Start JN749** 1 to be revised without notice Head, Cleaner JM79904-0 1 Label, Accessory RPR JN79901-0 1 Thermal, Roll Paper JM79907-0 1 Ribbon (B110A) 35*114 JM39901-0 1 Ribbon Core 25*114 JM39902-0 1 5-55 @ For CSA CL-S700/CL-S703 Chapter 5 Parts Lists Chapter 5 Parts Lists for CL-S700R Table of Contents Recommended Spare Parts List .............................................................................................. 5-56 Drawing No. 1 Parts List & Location for General Assembly ............................................... 5-58 Drawing No. 2 Parts List & Location for Unit, Rewinder..................................................... 5-63 Drawing No. 3 Parts List & Location for SA1, Peeler ......................................................... 5-69 Drawing No. 4 Parts List & Location for SA2, Peeler ......................................................... 5-72 5-55 CL-S700R Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700R Recommended Spare Parts List Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 CL-S700R 5-56 0 Date Apr. 18, 2008 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700R Item No. Location TITLE: Recommended Spare Parts List Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Part Name Sheet No. 1/1 Rev. No. 0 Maint. Class Worn Casual Remarks Dedicated for CL-S700R | 1 1-15 JN66801-0 Unit, Power Supply 1 2 2-13 JN09802-0 Unit, Head 1 3 8-9 JN48704-0 SA, Sensor U 1 | Adjustable type 4 8-24 JN48705-0 SA, Sensor Bottom 1 | Adjustable type 5 9-1 JN28801-0 Unit, Roller Platen 1 | 6 9-39 JN25803-0 Unit, Motor 1 | 7 9-7 JN48701-0 SA, Sensor U 1 | Fixed type 8 9-18 JN48702-0 SA, Sensor Bottom 1 | Fixed type 9 14-2 JN66718-0 SA, Main PCB (200R) 1 | | | | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 5-57 CL-S700R Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700R Drawing No. 1 Parts List & Location for General Assembly Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. CL-S700R 5-58 Date 1/3 0 Apr. 18, 2008 2/3 0 Apr. 18, 2008 3/3 0 Apr. 18, 2008 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 1 General Assembly (Rev. 0) for CL-S700R 5-59 CL-S700R Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700R TITLE: General Assembly Sheet No. 1/3 Drawing No. 1 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 1-1 Roll Holder JE99090-0 1 1-2 Flange, Paper Wide JM79201-0 1 1-3 Unit, Top Cover 1-4 ---- 1 Cover, Hinge JN56209-0 2 1-5 Holder, Paper Shaft Left JN56116-0 1 1-6 SA, Cover Inner Power JN56704-0 1 1-7 SA, Ribbon Holder JM34710-1 2 1-8 Stopper, Hinge JN54103-0 2 1-9 SA, Hinge JN59905-0 2 1-10 Unit, Mechanism JN99801-0 1 1-11 Cover, Inner Paper JN56112-0 1 1-12 Unit, PCB - 1 1-13 Sheet 1, Power Protect JN54910-0 1 1-14 Plate, Power JN64101-0 1 1-15 Unit, Power Supply JN66801-0 1 1-16 Cover, Cable JN56201-0 1 1-17 SA, Power Cable JN67706-0 1 1-18 Cable, Ope-pane FFC JN67901-0 1 1-19 WS-2NS (Cable, Clamp) JN59903-0 3 1-20 SA, Fan JN65901-0 1 CL-S700R 5-60 Remarks 24600730 Ref: Drawing No. 10 / CL-S700, S703 Ref: Drawing No. 2 / CL-S700, S703 Ref.: Drawing No. 14 / CL-S700, S703 Dedicated for CL-S700R Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700R TITLE: General Assembly Sheet No. 2/3 Drawing No. 1 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 1-21 SA, Power SW Cable JN67709-0 1 1-22 Rail, Guide U JN54906-0 1 1-23 Rail, Guide Base JN54907-0 1 1-24 Guide, Top Cover JN54202-0 1 1-25 - - - 1-26 SA, Ope-pane JN56705-0 1 1-27 - - - 1-28 SA, Front Right JN56707-0 1 1-29 SA, Case L JN56701-1 1 1-30 - - - 1-31 Plate, Cable Cover JN56113-0 1 1-32 Cover, Sensor Adjust JN56115-0 1 1-33 Holder, Paper Shaft Right JN56117-0 1 1-34 Cover, Inner PCB Front JN56110-0 1 1-35 SA, Cover Inner PCB Rear JN56713-0 1 1-36 Screw, FH, M3.0x6 E00230-060F 2 1-37 Screw, BH, M3.0x5 E00530-050F 19 1-38 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M3.0x5 E04030-050F 15 1-39 Screw, BH, M3.0x5K E00530-050KF 11 1-40 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M4.0x30 E00940-300F 4 5-61 Remarks Dedicated for CL-S700R Including Inlet Ref.: Drawing No. 11 / CL-S700, S703 Ref.: Drawing No. 13 / CL-S700, S703 CL-S700R Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700R TITLE: General Assembly Sheet No. 3/3 Drawing No. 1 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit Remarks Dedicated for CL-S700R 1-41 Screw, FH, M3.0x6 E00230-060F 2 1-42 Screw, PH, M3.0x12 E00130-120F 1 1-43 Screw, BH (N), M4.0x4 E00540-040WF 1 1-44 Washer, EXT, T (N), 4 E50740-000WF 1 1-45 SA2, Peeler JN29713-0 1 1-46 Label, Peel Guidance JN99907-0 1 | 1-47 Cushion, Damper JN24143-0 1 | 1-48 Sheet, Damper JN24142-0 1 | 1-49 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M3.0x5 E04030-050F 2 | 1-50 Screw, BH, M3.0x5 E00530-050F 2 | CL-S700R 5-62 Ref.: Drawing No. 4 | Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700R Drawing No. 2 Parts List & Location for Unit, Rewinder Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 5-63 Date 1/4 0 Apr. 18, 2008 2/4 0 Apr. 18, 2008 3/4 0 Apr. 18, 2008 4/4 0 Apr. 18, 2008 CL-S700R Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 2 Unit, Rewinder (Rev. 0) for CL-S700R 2-62 2-4 Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the places marked with . 2-2 2-1 2-3 2-61 (DRW NO.3) 2-20 2-5 2-64 2-61 2-6 2-19 2-8 2-9 2-7 2-10 2-21 2-22 2-66 2-35 2-64 2-30 2-32 2-63 2-63 2-15 2-66 2-64 2-23 2-61 2-66 2-64 2-17 2-6 2-18 2-22 2-24 2-63 2-31 2-64 2-64 2-37 2-63 2-65 2-64 2-34 2-61 2-36 2-64 2-14 2-16 2-12 2-33 2-11 2-63 2-64 2-61 2-64 2-25 2-26 2-63 2-67 2-61 2-27 2-38 2-64 2-63 2-63 2-63 2-66 2-28 2-66 2-40 2-39 2-61 2-59 2-43 2-66 2-41 2-13 2-44 2-51 2-63 2-61 2-58 2-64 2-64 2-35 2-64 2-39 2-47 2-29 2-42 2-45 2-46 2-57 2-66 2-59 2-66 2-64 2-48 2-52 2-55 2-64 2-63 2-49 2-50 2-53 2-63 2-56 2-54 2-56 CL-S700R 2-63 5-64 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700R TITLE: Unit, Rewinder Sheet No. 1/4 Drawing No. 2 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 2-1 Shaft, Measure Sensor JN22018-0 1 2-2 Spring, Measure Sensor L JN23609-0 1 2-3 Spring, Measure Sensor R JN23610-0 1 2-4 Plate, Measure Sensor JN24120-0 1 2-5 Plate, Measure Flap JN24121-0 1 2-6 Shaft, Damper JN22012-0 2 2-7 Roller, Measure Sensor JN24225-0 4 2-8 SA, Rewinder Motor JN29710-0 1 2-9 Pivot, Rewinder Motor Plate JN22017-0 1 2-10 Guide, Motor Plate JN24223-0 1 2-11 Spring, Rewinder Motor JN23608-0 1 2-12 Sheet, Damper Plate Cover JN24145-0 1 2-13 Sheet, Peel Sensor Cover JN24144-0 1 2-14 Guide, Rewinder Flange JN24226-0 2 2-15 SA, Interlock SW JN68710-0 1 2-16 Plate, Nut JN24138-0 1 2-17 Stopper, Rewinder Door JN24227-0 2 2-18 Frame, Rewinder Inner JN44110-0 1 2-19 SA, Rewinder Flange JN29708-0 1 2-20 SA1, Peeler JN29706-0 1 5-65 Remarks @ CL-S700R Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700R TITLE: Unit, Rewinder Sheet No. 2/4 Drawing No. 2 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 2-21 Shaft, Guide Roller JN22015-0 1 2-22 Roller, Damper JN24216-0 7 2-23 Spring, Damper Rewinder L JN23604-0 1 2-24 Shaft, Handle Plate JN22014-0 1 2-25 Spring, Damper Rewinder R JN23605-0 1 2-26 Plate, Damper JN24114-0 1 2-27 Spring, Handle R JN23606-0 1 2-28 Plate, Handle JN24115-0 1 2-29 SA, Handle Link JN56716-0 1 2-30 Frame2, Door Center JN56135-0 1 2-31 Frame1, Door Center JN56134-0 1 2-32 Holder, Rewinder Shaft L JN24210-0 1 2-33 Frame, Door L JN56132-0 1 2-34 Plate, Rewinder SW JN24213-0 1 2-35 Stopper Rewinder JN24211-0 2 2-36 Plate, Torque Limiter JN24124-0 1 2-37 Torque Limiter JN29903-0 1 2-38 Holder, Door Shaft L JN24126-0 1 2-39 Ring, Damper JN24212-0 2 2-40 Shaft, Door JN22020-0 1 CL-S700R 5-66 Remarks @ Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700R TITLE: Unit, Rewinder Sheet No. 3/4 Drawing No. 2 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 2-41 Pin, Parallel(A), M2.0×12 E70120-120F 2 2-42 Holder, Rewinder Shaft R JN24209-0 1 2-43 Frame, Door R JN56133-0 1 2-44 Holder, Door Shaft R JN24127-0 1 2-45 Case, Rewinder Front L JN56215-0 1 2-46 SA1, Front Case Rewinder L JN56723-0 1 2-47 Sheet, Anti-Adhere JN54107-0 1 2-48 Cover Rewinder JN24215-0 1 2-49 Handle JN24217-0 1 2-50 Door, Rewinder JN56214-0 1 2-51 Shaft, Handle JN22016-0 1 2-52 Plate, Handle Bracket JN24116-0 1 2-53 SA1, Front Case Rewinder R JN56725-0 1 2-54 Case, Rewinder Front R JN56216-0 1 2-55 SA1, Rewinder Case JN56718-0 1 2-56 Leg, Case JN56901-0 4 2-57 CKS-16-L (Cable, Clamp) JN59904-0 2 2-58 Plate, Spring Rewinder JN24125-0 1 2-59 SA, Rewinder PCB JN66705-0 1 2-60 SA, RW Cable JN67721-0 1 5-67 Remarks @ CL-S700R Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700R TITLE: Unit, Rewinder Sheet No. 4/4 Drawing No. 2 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 2-61 E-Ring, 3.0 E60330-000F 11 2-62 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M3.0×6 E04030-060F 2 2-63 Screw, PHT (#2), M3.0x6 E10130-060F 22 2-64 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M3.0×5 E04030-050F 24 2-65 Screw, PH (PW), M2×10 E00620-100F 2 2-66 E-Ring, 4.0 E60340-000F 11 2-67 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M3.0×4 E04030-040F 2 CL-S700R 5-68 Remarks @ Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700R Drawing No. 3 Parts List & Location for SA1, Peeler Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 5-69 0 Date Apr. 18, 2008 CL-S700R Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 3 SA1, Peeler (Rev. 0) for CL-S700R 3-1 Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the places marked with . 3-3 3-13 3-7 3-9 3-8 3-4 3-12 3-2 3-5 3-13 3-2 3-3 3-7 3-6 3-2 3-7 3-15 3-10 3-11 3-14 CL-S700R 5-70 Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700R TITLE: SA1, Peeler Sheet No. 1/1 Drawing No. 3 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 3-1 Roller, Idle Rewinder JN28502-0 1 3-2 Bush, Idle JE99750-0 3 3-3 Plate, Friction Link JE99325-0 2 3-4 Spring, L Friction JE99761-0 1 3-5 Spring, R Friction JE99760-0 1 3-6 Roller, Friction JE99758-0 1 3-7 Bush, Friction JE99762-0 3 3-8 Plate, Sensor Holder JN24112-0 1 3-9 Plate1, Peeler JN24111-0 1 3-10 Plate, Friction Peeler JN24113-0 1 3-11 SA, Peel Sensor JE69149-2 1 3-12 E-Ring, 2.0 E60320-000F 1 3-13 Screw, PH(SW+PW), M3.0x5 E04030-050F 2 3-14 Screw,PH,M2.0x3 E00120-030WF 2 3-15 Screw, BH, M3.0x5 E00530-050F 2 5-71 Remarks @ CL-S700R Chapter 5 Parts Lists CL-S700R Drawing No. 4 Parts List & Location for SA2, Peeler Revision Up List Sheet No. Rev. No. 1/1 CL-S700R 5-72 0 Date Apr. 18, 2008 Chapter 5 Parts Lists DRAWING NO. 4 SA2, Peeler (Rev. 0) for CL-S700R 4-7 4-5 Apply grease (Floil G-311S) to the places marked with . 4-6 4-3 4-2 4-4 4-8 4-9 4-1 5-73 CL-S700R Chapter 5 Parts Lists PARTS LIST for CL-S700R TITLE: SA2, Peeler Sheet No. 1/1 Drawing No. 4 Location Part Name Part No. Rev. No. 0 Q'ty/ Unit 4-1 Roll, Peel JE99338-1 1 4-2 Plate2, Peeler JN24123-0 1 4-3 Bushing, Peel Roller JE99370-0 1 4-4 Shaft, Oneway Clutch JE99366-0 1 4-5 SA1, Peel Gear JE99335-1 1 4-6 Screw, TH, M2.0×4 (NI) E00420-040WF 1 4-7 Screw, PH (SW+PW#2), M2.6×14 E00926-140F 1 4-8 Bushing2, Peel Roller JE99341-0 1 4-9 E-Ring, 4.0 E60340-000F 1 CL-S700R 5-74 Remarks @ Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams CHAPTER 6 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Table of Contents Inter Connection (Main PCB 1/15) (CL-S700/CL-S703) .......................................................... 6-3 Inter Connection (Main PCB 1/15) (CL-S700R) ....................................................................... 6-4 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 2/15) [CPU (1)]............................................................................. 6-5 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 3/15) [CPU (2)/DAC] .................................................................... 6-6 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 4/15) [ROM] ................................................................................. 6-7 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 5/15) [RAM].................................................................................. 6-8 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 6/15) [Custom IC]......................................................................... 6-9 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 7/15) [Head Control] .................................................................... 6-10 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 8/15) [PF Motor Control] .............................................................. 6-11 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 9/15) [Sensor] .............................................................................. 6-12 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 10/15) [Power/Buzzer/Fan] .......................................................... 6-13 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 11/15) [RFID/Ope-Pane] .............................................................. 6-14 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 12/15) [Cutter/Rewinder].............................................................. 6-15 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 13/15) [Centronics I/F] ................................................................. 6-16 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 14/15) [Serial I/F] ......................................................................... 6-17 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 15/15) [USB I/F] ........................................................................... 6-18 Circuit Diagram (Power Supply PCB (100/240V)) ................................................................... 6-19 Circuit Diagram (Ope-pane PCB)............................................................................................. 6-20 Circuit Diagram (Centronics PCB) ........................................................................................... 6-21 Circuit Diagram (Connect PCB) (CL-S700/CL-S703) .............................................................. 6-22 Circuit Diagram (Rewinder PCB) (CL-S700R) ......................................................................... 6-23 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 6-2 Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Inter Connection (Main PCB 1/15) (CL-S700/CL-S703) 1 2 3 4 UNIT, MOTOR JN25801-**F UNIT, HEAD SA, FRONT SENS U JN68702-**F MOTOR SA, PF MTR THM JN68706-**F SA, HEAD CABLE SA, PF MTR CABLE JN67705-**F J4 J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 +5V S.GND P.GND P.GND P.GND P.GND +24V +24V +24V +24V J11 B 1 2 3 4 5 6 HEADCLK HEADD1 HEADLAT +3.3V HDTMP P.GND P.GND P.GND P.GND P.GND +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V 1 2 3 1 2 SA, UPPER SENS PCB JN66720-**F SA, LOWER SENS PCB JN66721-**F SA, RIB SENS PCB JN66722-**F 1 2 3 4 1 2 UP LED A UP LED K SA, FRONT SENS CABLE L JN67714-**F 1 2 3 4 1 2 SA, RIB ENC CABLE JN66704-**F J22 1 2 3 4 UP LED A UP LED K SA, HEAD UP CABLE JN66703-**F J9 J8 DOWN LED A DOWN LED K DOWN TR C DOWN TR E D LED A LED K TR C TR E SA, ADJ SENS CABLE L JN67713-**F J7 DOWN LED A DOWN LED K DOWN TR C DOWN TR E SA, HEAD UP SW JN68704-**F PHOTO INT 1 2 3 4 DOWN LED A DOWN LED K DOWN TR C DOWN TR E SA, ADJ SENS CABLE U JN67701-**F J21 1 2 3 4 UP LED A UP LED K IED PHOTO TR IED 1 2 DOWN LED A DOWN LED K DOWN TR C DOWN TR E LED A LED K TR C TR E 1 2 3 4 1 2 HDUSENS S.GND SA,MAIN PCB (200) JN66701-**F C SA,MAIN PCB (300) JN66702-**F FAN + FAN FANLOCK J12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 +5V S.GND TXD1 RXD1 S.GND S.GND N.C. N.C. RFRUN RFOSC +5V +3.3V N.C. S.GND DACIN DACCLK CS_LCD LCD_CD LCD_LED4 LCD_LED3 LCD_LED2 J13 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LCD_LED1 N.C. N.C. SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 CV_OPN N.C. S.GND S.GND +24V +24V P.GND P.GND S.GND DCMTR0 DCMTR1 HPSENS0 HPSENS1 MTTH CPRTYP0 10 11 J14 RF-ID(OPTION) SA,POWER CABLE JN67706-**F SA,FAN JN65901-**F AC INPUT +5V +3.3V N.C. S.GND DACIN DACCLK CS_LCD LCD_CD LCD_LED4 LCD_LED3 LCD_LED2 +24V +24V P.GND P.GND S.GND DCMTR0 DCMTR1 HPSENS0 HPSENS1 MTTH CPRTYP0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LCD_LED1 N.C. N.C. SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 CV_OPN N.C. S.GND S.GND 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 xSTROBE S.GND DATA0 S.GND DATA1 S.GND DATA2 S.GND DATA3 S.GND DATA4 S.GND DATA5 S.GND DATA6 S.GND DATA7 S.GND xACKNLG S.GND J16 BUSY S.GND PE S.GND SLCT xPRIME xATFD-XT xFAULT N.C. S.GND IETYP0 IETYP1 N.C. N.C. +5V xSLCT-IN +5V xRESET N.C. N.C. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 F.GND TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR SGND N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. +5V S.GND MTREF MTENC OPN PEELSENS CPRTYP1 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 +5V N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. DTR N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. USBVCC DM DP USBLGND 1 2 3 4 J18 SA,CENTRO CABLE JN67708-**F J19 RS232C USB1.1 B CN101 J803 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 J17 SA,OPTION CABLE 2 JN67716-**F J801 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 +5V S.GND MTREF MTENC OPN PEELSENS CPRTYP1 SA,OPTION CABLE 1 JN67715-**F J401 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J15 CABLE,OPEPANE FFC JN67901-**F AC/DC CONVERTER UNIT,POWER SUPPLY JN66801-**F SA, LOWER SENS PCB JN66721-**F J6 VREF(+3V) MOTTMP 8 SA, RIB ENC SENS JN68703-**F SA, FRONT SENS CABLE U JN67702-**F J5 -A BCOM -B A ACOM B 7 SA, ADJ SENS L JN68707-**F SA,CENTRONICS I/F CON PCB JM66710-**F CN102 C +24V +24V +24V +24V P.GND P.GND P.GND P.GND HEADSTB HEADD4 S.GND HEADD3 +5V HEADD2 HEADSTB 6 SA, ADJ SENS U JN68701-**F IED PHOTO TR D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 5 SA, FRONT SENS L JN68708-**F HOST COMPUTER IEEE1284 SA,CONNECT PCB JN66725-**F J802 J804 LED x8 SW x4 LCD SA,OPEPANE PCB JN66704-**F A A AUTO CUTTER (OPTION) PEELER (OPTION) Title Inter Connection (CL-S700/CL-S703) (1/15) Size A4 Number 1 2 3 4 5 6-3 6 Revision JN66701-0/JN66702-0 Date: File: A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Inter Connection (Main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hapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 2/15) [CPU (1)] 1 2 3 4 5 T1 X1 6 165 1M X2 U1A R5 0 164 R4 *0 R1 X1 R3 *0 D R10 0 R11 0 V3R3 T20 R21 SB V 4 3 G C X2 FCXO-03L(48MHz) 15 15 0 2007/1/18 1 2 C 6,8,13 -GRESET 2007/1/18 2007/1/18 2007/1/18 2007/1/18 2007/1/18 V3R3 R30 22k 11 14 14 11 15 R31 22k T25 T27 T29 155 154 153 T33 T35 T37 T39 T41 152 149 148 147 146 145 T45 T47 T49 T51 T53 T55 25 24 23 22 21 20 T58 T60 T61 19 18 17 T65 T67 T69 T71 T73 T75 176 175 174 173 172 171 T79 T81 T83 T85 T86 T88 34 33 32 31 30 29 T93 T95 T97 T99 T101 T103 T104 T106 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ANI0 ANI1 ANI2 ANI3 ANI4 ANI5 ANI6 ANI7 T112 4 13 AVREFP AVREFM UBINTP PLDRXDO TXD0 11 11 3,11 6 3,11 RXD1 TXD1 DACCLK CNINTP DACIN 6 6 HEREQ0 HEACK0 6 6 6,8 CEREQ1 CEACK1 PFCLK 6 6 6 OPINTP HDINTP ITV 12 12 9 11 10 10 MTENC OPN HDUSENS CV_OPN FANLOCK BUZZER 9 9 7 8 7 7 12 12 3R0V VREF SENSFIX SENSMOVE HDTMP MOTTMP VHEADMON HEADRES MTTH PEELSENS P11/SCK0/INTP11 P12/RXD0/SI0 P13/TXD0/SO0 P20/NMI P21/RXD1/INTP21 P22/TXD1/INTP22 P23/SCK1/INTP23 P24/SI1/INTP24 P25/SO1/INTP25 P50/INTP50/DMARQ0 P51/INTP51/DMAAK0 P52/INTP52/TC0 P53/INTPC00/TIC0/DMARQ1 P54/INTPC01/DMAAK1 P55/TOC0/TC1 PDH0/D16/INTPD0 PDH1/D17/INTPD1 PDH2/D18/INTPD2/TOC4 PDH3/D19/INTPD3 PDH4/D20/INTPD4 PDH5/D21/INTPD5/TOC5 PDH6/D22/INTPD6/INTP100/TCUD10 PDH7/D23/INTPD7/INTP101/TCLR10 PDH8/D24/INTPD8/TO10 PDH9/D25/INTPD9/TIUD10 PDH10/D26/INTPD10/INTP110/TCUD11 PDH11/D27/INTPD11/INTP111/TCLR11 PDH12/D28/INTPD12/TO11 PDH13/D29/INTPD13/TIUD11 PDH14/D30/INTPD14/PWM0 PDH15/D31/INTPD15/PWM1 PAL0/INTPL0/A0 PAL1/INTPL1/A1 P65/INTP65/INTPC10/TIC1 P66/INTP66/INTPC11 P67/INTP67/TOC1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 P72/DMARQ2/INTPC20/TIC2 P73/DMAAK2/INTPC21 P74/TC2/TOC2 P75/DMARQ3/INTPC30/TIC3 P76/DMAAK3/INTPC31 P77/TC3/TOC3 PCM0/WAIT PCM1 PCM2/HLDAK PCM3/HLDRQ PCM4/REFRQ PCM5/SELFREF/ADTRG PAH0/A16 PAH1/A17 PAH2/A18 PAH3/A19 PAH4/A20 PAH5/A21 PAH6/A22 PAH7/A23 PAH8/A24 PAH9/A25 PCS0/CS0 PCS1/CS1 PCS2/CS2/IOWR PCS3/CS3 PCS4/CS4 PCS5/CS5/IORD PCS6/CS6 PCS7/CS7 U2 1 R46 100k/1% 2 4 REF A1 A2 K NC 3 5 U3 BD5328FVE V3R3 uPC1093TA 5 C3 0.1u/16 2 4 RESET VDD VOUT SUB GND CT 10,14 1 3 T119 28 PCD0/SDCKE PCD1/BUSCLK PCD2/SDCAS PCD3/SDRAS RESET T122 PCT0/LLWR/LLBE/LLDQM PCT1/LUWR/LUBE/LUDQM PCT2/ULWR/ULBE/ULDQM PCT3/UUWR/UUBE/UUDQM PCT4/RD PCT5/WE/WR PCT7/BCYST V3R3 C4 1000p/50 R49 *0 A T377 R193 0 R53 0 R194 *0 15 16 156 MODE1 MODE0 PLLSEL T128 112 113 114 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 130 131 T30 T31 T32 T34 T36 T38 T40 T42 T43 T44 T46 T48 T50 T52 T54 T56 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 76 75 T57 T59 A1 74 73 72 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 T62 T63 T64 T66 T68 T70 T72 T74 T76 T77 T78 T80 T82 T84 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 58 57 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 T87 T89 T90 T91 T92 T94 T96 T98 T100 T102 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 44 43 42 41 40 37 36 35 T105 T107 T109 T110 T111 T113 T114 T115 91 88 87 86 T116 T117 T120 T121 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 T123 T124 T125 T126 T127 T129 T130 D[31:16] A[24:1] R48 V850/ME2 0 T118 Title A4 3 4 5 6-5 6 5 RIBENC A[24:1] 9 4,5,6 B RIBSENS 9 -ROM1CS -SDRAMCS -IOWR -GACS DCMTR0 -IORD -ROM2CS DCMTR1 4 5 6 6 12 6 4 12 SDCKE BUSCLK -SDCAS -SDRAS 5 5,6 5 5 LLDQM/-LLBE LUDQM/-LUBE ULDQM/-ULBE UUDQM/-UUBE -RD -WE/-WR FANCTL 4,5,6 4,5,6 5 5 4,6 5 10 2007/1/18 2007/1/18 2007/1/18 2007/1/18 A 2007/1/18 (2/15) MAIN PCB - CPU (1) Number Revision JN66701-0 Date: File: 2 D[31:16] V3R3 Size 1 4,5,6 C 22k 161 UDM 160 UDP 159 P10/UCLK/INTP10 D[15:0] D R43 T16 T18 T21 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 22k 22k 22k 22k UDM UDP T3 T4 T5 T7 T9 T11 T13 T14 T15 T17 T19 T22 T23 T24 T26 T28 R42 R41 R40 R39 1 JIT1 2 JIT0 169 SSEL1 170 SSEL0 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 22k 22k 22k R33 22k V5R0 20k/1% T6 T8 T10 T12 D[15:0] D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 R38 R37 R36 R32 22k T108 R45 15 6 14 R13 *0 RFOSC LDSR0 LDTR0 RFRUN USBON B R44 220 R12 0 8 C2 12p/50 C1 12p/50 V3R3 R2 *0 7 16MHz T2 A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 3/15) [CPU (2)/DAC] 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 V3R3 J1 U1C D TRCDATA3 TRCDATA2 TRCDATA1 TRCDATA0 TRCEND TRCCLK DDO DDI DRST DMS DCK 132 133 136 137 138 139 T132 T134 T136 T138 T140 T142 R54 R55 R56 R57 R58 R59 0 0 0 0 0 0 T133 T135 T137 T139 T141 T143 140 141 142 143 144 T144 T146 T147 T148 T149 R60 0 T145 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 TRCCLK TRCDATA0 TRCDATA1 TRCDATA2 TRCDATA3 TRCEND DDI DCK DMS DDO DRSTZ 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 D 24FLT V3R3 R61 R63 R64 R65 V850/ME2 C U1B V3R3 38 53 70 89 100 115 128 150 3 162 163 EVSS EVSS EVSS EVSS EVSS EVSS EVSS EVSS AVSS OSCVSS IVDD IVDD IVDD IVDD IVDD IVDD PLLVDD 26 55 84 102 134 157 167 V3R3 R66 *22k 2,11 2,11 6 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 39 54 71 90 101 116 129 151 14 166 C V1R5 C22 C21 C20 C19 C18 C17 C16 EVDD EVDD EVDD EVDD EVDD EVDD EVDD EVDD AVDD UVDD OSCVDD C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 B R62 22k 4.7k 4.7k 4.7k 4.7k IVSS IVSS IVSS IVSS IVSS IVSS PLLVSS VREF R67 22k R68 22k DACIN DACCLK CS_DAC R195 22k R196 *22k 27 56 85 103 135 158 168 U4 12 DI 11 CLK 10 CSB 13 VFS 3 4 7 8 AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4 TM1 VDD TM2 NC1 VSS NC2 1 2 5 6 T150 T151 T152 T155 V5R0 PFMOTCU PESNSLED R69 T153 22k 3 2 C23 1000p/50 R192 *22k 9 14 8 9 U5A 1 + - T154 MTREF 12 BA2904 C24 0.1u/16 BH2227 B V850/ME2 A A Title Size A4 Number CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2 3 4 5 6-6 6 Revision JN66701-0 Date: File: 1 (3/15) MAIN PCB - CPU (2) / DAC A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 4/15) [ROM] 1 2 2,5,6 D[15:0] 2,5,6 3 4 5 6 7 8 D[15:0] A[24:1] A[24:1] V3R3 5 C25 0.1u/16 A20 N 4 2 V G TC7SH04 A21 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 R70 *0 U6 A22 R72 0 10 9 16 17 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 T157 26 28 11 T159 V3R3 C26 C U9 U8A U7A T156 3 D A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 NC D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 45 43 41 39 36 34 32 30 44 42 40 38 35 33 31 29 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 V3R3 BYTE CE OE WE A22 47 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 R71 0 T158 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 A21 15 RY/BY 12 RESET D D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 CE OE WE 45 43 41 39 36 34 32 30 44 42 40 38 35 33 31 29 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 V3R3 BYTE 26 28 11 W19B320ATT7M *0.1u/16 10 9 16 17 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 47 15 RY/BY 12 RESET C *S29JL064H70TFI000 1 V5 2 4 G3 *7SH32 2,6 2,5,6 2,5,6 2 2 -RD LLDQM/-LLBE LUDQM/-LUBE -ROM1CS -ROM2CS J2 Program ROM Address B CPU Address ROM Address 000000h -- (N/A) 100000h 100000h 200000h 200000h LUDQM/-LUBE LLDQM/-LLBE -ROM1CS -RD D0 D2 D4 D6 D8 D10 D12 D14 For 16M (000000h) 300000h 300000h 400000h 400000h For 32M (000000h) 500000h 500000h 600000h 600000h V3R3 C27 V3R3 *0.1u/16 T161 (Highre order 8M is not available.) 700000h 700000h 4 N A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A11 A13 A15 A17 A19 A21 B T160 V3R3 D1 D3 D5 D7 D9 D11 D13 D15 *8830E-050 V 2 G *TC7SH04 A 3 A R73 *3.3k 5 U10 For 64M B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20 U7B V3R3 14 VCC1 37 VCC2 27 GND1 46 GND2 W19B320ATT7M 1 2 3 4 U8B 14 VCC1 37 VCC2 27 GND1 46 GND2 C28 0.1u/16 Title C29 0.1u/16 Size A4 *S29JL064H70TFI000 5 6-7 V3R3 Number Revision JN66701-0 Date: File: 6 (4/15) MAIN PCB - ROM A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 5/15) [RAM] 1 2 2,4,6 D[15:0] 2,4,6 A[24:1] 3 4 5 D[15:0] U11A A[24:1] 36 35 22 34 33 32 31 30 29 26 25 24 23 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 D A21 A22 A23 A24 2 -SDRAMCS 2 -WE/-WR R74 R75 R76 R77 R78 R79 *0 0 *0 *0 0 *0 T162 T163 20 21 40 19 16 37 38 2 SDCKE 2,6 BUSCLK NC(A12) A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 BS0 BS1 DQ15 DQ14 DQ13 DQ12 DQ11 DQ10 DQ9 DQ8 DQ7 DQ6 DQ5 DQ4 DQ3 DQ2 DQ1 DQ0 NC RAS CAS CS WE CKE CLK UDQM LDQM 53 51 50 48 47 45 44 42 13 11 10 8 7 5 4 2 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 2 D[31:16] 2,4,6 A[24:1] 6 D[31:16] U12A A[24:1] A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 18 17 36 35 22 34 33 32 31 30 29 26 25 24 23 NC(A12) A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 20 21 BS0 BS1 40 NC 19 16 2 -SDRAMCS 2 -WE/-WR 39 15 CS WE 37 38 2 SDCKE 2,6 BUSCLK 2,4,6 2,4,6 A[24:1] D[15:0] VDD VDD VDD VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ U13A A[24:1] B A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 36 35 22 34 33 32 31 30 29 26 25 24 23 20 21 40 19 16 2 -SDRAMCS 2 -WE/-WR 37 38 2 SDCKE 2,6 BUSCLK NC(A12) A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 BA0 BA1 DQ15 DQ14 DQ13 DQ12 DQ11 DQ10 DQ9 DQ8 DQ7 DQ6 DQ5 DQ4 DQ3 DQ2 DQ1 DQ0 53 51 50 48 47 45 44 42 13 11 10 8 7 5 4 2 RAS CAS 18 17 C V3R3 CKE CLK VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VSS VSS VSS 1 14 27 3 9 43 49 C30 C31 C32 C33 V3R3 C34 C35 39 UDQM 15 LDQM LLDQM/-LLBE LUDQM/-LUBE VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VSS VSS VSS 2 -SDCAS 2 -SDRAS VDD VDD VDD VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ C36 VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VSS VSS VSS 1 14 27 3 9 43 49 C37 C38 C39 C40 V3R3 C41 C42 C43 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 6 12 46 52 28 41 54 B W9864G6EH-7 W9864G6EH-7 VDD VDD VDD VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ V3R3 U12B 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 0.1u/16 6 12 46 52 28 41 54 V3R3 U13B NC CS WE D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 *HY57V281620E 2,4,6 2,4,6 18 17 D 2 -SDCAS 2 -SDRAS U11B 2,4,6 RAS CAS D31 D30 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 W9864G6EH-7 2 -SDCAS 2 -SDRAS D[15:0] 53 51 50 48 47 45 44 42 13 11 10 8 7 5 4 2 2 ULDQM/-ULBE 2 UUDQM/-UUBE LLDQM/-LLBE LUDQM/-LUBE 2,4,6 DQ15 DQ14 DQ13 DQ12 DQ11 DQ10 DQ9 DQ8 DQ7 DQ6 DQ5 DQ4 DQ3 DQ2 DQ1 DQ0 UDQM 39 LDQM 15 CKE CLK W9864G6EH-7 C 8 7 1 14 27 3 9 43 49 6 12 46 52 28 41 54 *HY57V281620E A A Title Size A4 Number CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2 3 4 5 6-8 6 Revision JN66701-0 Date: File: 1 (5/15) MAIN PCB - RAM A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 6/15) [Custom IC] 1 2 3 4 5 X3 *16MHz R80 R81 *1M *1M T164 C51 12p/50 6 7 8 T165 D C52 *12p/50 D 2,4,5 27 28 32 33 34 35 36 A18 A17 A16 A4 A3 A2 A1 A18 A17 A16 A4 A3 A2 A1 3 Xout A[24:1] A[24:1] Xin 2,4,5 2 T166 U14 CLKIN CLKSEL PFCLK PFCNT1 PFCNT2 PFMXB PFMXA PFMB PFMA PFON D[15:0] D[15:0] D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 C T202 T203 T204 T205 T207 T209 T211 T213 T214 T215 T216 T217 T218 T219 T220 T221 T222 T223 T224 6 54 T225 26 V5ON LEDFIX_T LEDFIX_R 10 9 9 CNINTP CEREQ1 CEACK1 xSLCT-IN xPRIME xATFD-XT xSTROBE PLH xFAULT SLCT 2 2 2 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 PE BUSY xACKNLG OBDIR 13 13 13 13 PLDRXDO 2 -GRESET 2,8,13 1k 1k 1k 1k DATA[7:0] DATA[7:0] DATA7 DATA6 DATA5 DATA4 DATA3 DATA2 DATA1 DATA0 13 V3R3 R92 22k PLDRXDI 14 V3R3 29 112 118 A Title Size 4 5 6-9 6 (6/15) MAIN PCB - CUSTOM IC Number Revision JN66701-0 Date: File: 3 12 12 11 11 11 11 B A4 2 NA HPSENS0 HPSENS1 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 U_GA_uPD65946GJ-165-3EB-A 1 0 T193 T196 T198 T200 1000p/50 0.1u/16 TEB SMC AMC 8 10 11 55 56 57 58 59 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 76 R88 R89 R90 R91 0 V3R3 C56 0.1u/16 RESET 2 R83 NA C 22k C60 0.1u/16 RXDOUT RXDIN OPINTP R82 7 R87 C59 0.1u/16 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND T188 T190 T192 T195 T197 T199 HD[4:1] 1000p/50 C58 4 15 31 45 60 75 91 106 120 VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD 7 7 7 HD[4:1] 1000p/50 C57 A 1 5 30 61 90 T174 T175 T176 T177 T178 T179 T180 T181 T182 C55 V3R3 HDCLK HDVON HCVON CPU 22k PM0 PM1 PM2 PM3 2 2 2 7 7 HD4 HD3 HD2 HD1 CRYSTAL R86 T208 T210 T212 HDINTP HEREQ0 HEACK0 -HDLAT -HDSTB - Input Clock Setting for GATE ARRAY R83 *0 1000p/50 CPRTYP0 CPRTYP1 IETYP0 IETYP1 95 96 97 98 2,8 9 9 8 8 8 8 8 C54 12 12 13 13 T206 CNINTP CNREQ1 CNACK1 SELECTIN INIT AUTOFD STROBE PLH FAULT SELECT DATA7 DATA6 DATA5 DATA4 DATA3 DATA2 DATA1 DATA0 PEND BUSY ACK OTDIR 7 84 85 86 87 88 89 92 93 94 R82 0 PFCLK LEDMOVE_T LEDMOVE_R -PFMB -PFMA PFMB PFMA PFON C53 B LLDQM/-LLBE LUDQM/-LUBE ITV IORD IOWR CS RD SCK LLBE LUBE LWR HWR OPINTP SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 LED3 LED2 LED1 T168 T169 T170 T171 T172 V3R3 22k 2,4,5 2,4,5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 ITV -IORD -IOWR -GACS -RD OPRS OPRD OPE OPD3 OPD2 OPD1 OPD0 9 12 13 107 108 109 110 111 113 115 116 117 2,5 22k 2 2 2 2 2,4 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 HDINTP HDREQ0 HDACK0 HDLTH HDSTB HDATA4 HDATA3 HDATA2 HDATA1 HDCLK HDVON HCVON 14 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 BUSCLK T167 R85 T183 T184 T185 T187 T189 T191 T194 CS_DAC CS_LCD LCD_CD LCD_LED4 LCD_LED3 LCD_LED2 LCD_LED1 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 114 R84 3 11 11 11 11 11 11 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 119 A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 7/15) [Head Control] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 V24R0 3 T228 HDVON 10k T229 DTC114EM Q2 D V3R3 D 2 4 1 T227 10k 6 Q1 2SJ505S G D S R93 10k T226 R94 10k R95 30k/1% D1 RB521S R96 1k VHDON R97 3.3k/1% VHEADMON 2 HEADRES 2 C61 *1000p/50 V3R3 10k 6 10k T230 10k HCVON 10k Q3 DTA114EM R99 100/1%/2012 DTC114EM Q29 R100 1k T231 HEADRES C62 *1000p/50 D2 RB521S C 6 HD[4:1] V5R0 U15A HD[4:1] HD1 HD2 HD3 HD4 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 6 -HDSTB 6 HDCLK 6 -HDLAT 1 19 B A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 C Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 T232 T233 T234 T235 T236 T237 T239 J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 C63 10u/10 R101 0 T238 HEADSTB HEADD4 1OE 2OE HEADD3 HEADD2 HEADSTB HEADCLK HEADD1 HEADLAT 74HCT244 V3R3 2 HDTMP C64 *1000p/50 R102 30k/1% U15B VCC GND A V5R0 B S30B-PHDSS 20 10 C65 0.1u/16 A 74HCT244 Title Size A4 Number CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2 3 4 5 6-10 6 Revision JN66701-0 Date: File: 1 (7/15) MAIN PCB - HEAD CONTROL A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 8/15) [PF Motor Control] 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 V24R0 + C66 100u/50 V3R3 D U16A 1 2 2,6 PFCLK 6 PFON T240 15 14 C67 1u/B16 2,6,13 A B R104 10k 13 4 V3R3 CLR 74VHC123 U17 T243 T245 V5 1 2 G3 R105 10k C68 0.1u/16 T242 T244 4 Q4 XP132A11A1 4 T241 RX/CX CX 3 -GRESET Q Q 1 2 3 R103 200k 5 6 7 8 D Q5 DTC114EM 10k 10k J4 PFMTCOM T246 74AHC1G08 1 2 3 4 5 6 C69 U18 7 12 C 6 6 6 6 R106 3 PFMOTCU 6 5 17 16 PFMA -PFMA PFMB -PFMB T251 20k/1% R107 20k/1% 3 C71 0.1u/16 T252 9 14 T253 10 100p/100 OUTA OUTA OUTB OUTB VSA VSB INA INA INB INB OUTA -OUTA OUTB -OUTB T247 T248 T249 T250 8 1 18 11 -A BCOM -B A ACOM B B6B-EH-* C PF MOTOR C70 TDA TDB REFA 100p/100 2 13 RSA REFB GA GB RSB 4 15 VREF J5 U_MTR_SLA7033MPR 1 2 D6 D5 D4 *SFPB66 *SFPB66 *SFPB66 *SFPB66 100p/100 C79 0.1u/16 8 2 MOTTMP C78 VREF R111 3.3k/1% VREF R113 V3R3 TMPOFF C80 0.1u/16 1 + - 1000p/50 R114 3.3k/1% 3 2 T254 T255 R115 1k uPC393GR-9LG uPC393GR-9LG A R116 A *3.3k Title A4 Number 3 4 5 6-11 6 Revision JN66701-0 Date: File: 2 (8/15) MAIN PCB - PF MOTOR CONTROL Size 1 R110 3.3k/1% R112 1k/1% 100k U19A 8 4 D3 V- 100p/100 V+ C75 V3R3 74VHC123 U19C B 16 74VHC123 CLR C77 100p/50 100p/100 11 G C74 RX/CX CX V PF MOTOR THRM 100p/100 7 6 U16C C73 5 Q 12 Q A B 0.68/2%/3W 0.68/2%/3W U16B 9 10 C76 100p/50 C72 R109 R108 B B2B-PH-K-S A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 9/15) [Sensor] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 6 6 6 D LEDFIX_R LEDFIX_T LEDMOVE_R LEDMOVE_T R117 U20A 1 SENSFIX C81 1000p/50 3 2 + - R118 R203 22k R202 22k Q25 2SC5658 T368 Q26 2SC5658 T256 10k T371 Q7 DTA114EM T257 Q8 DTA114EM 10k Q27 2SC5658 T258 T370 10k Q6 DTA114EM 10k 10k Q28 2SC5658 Q9 DTA114EM T259 T260 T261 T262 T263 D V3R3 J6 1 2 100 J21 T265 *100 *BA2904 R121 3.3k 1 2 3 4 R206 3.3k T379 3 T266 3 2 T264 R201 22k 10k T369 R200 22k 10k V3R3 10k V5R0 VR2 10k 2 DOWN LED A DOWN LED K DOWN TR C DOWN TR E B4B-PH-K-E 2 FIX LED/SENSOR Blue 1 1 VR1 10k UP LED A UP LED K B2B-PH-K-E T364 T365 V3R3 10k 10k 10k 10k J7 R120 100 V5R0 SENSMOVE C83 1000p/50 V+ + - T267 R122 1 2 3 4 T268 *100 V- T269 R124 3.3k 2 DOWN LED A DOWN LED K DOWN TR C DOWN TR E C B4B-PH-K-R ADJUSTABLE LED/SENSOR Red 2 1 VR4 10k 1 VR3 10k R207 3.3k T380 3 4 *BA2904 5 6 UP LED A UP LED K B2B-PH-K-R J22 3 8 2 7 Q18 DTC114EM C82 *0.1u/16 U20B C 1 2 Q19 DTC114EM T367 T366 10k 10k 10k 10k Q20 DTC114EM Q21 DTC114EM V5R0 3 PESNSLED B R125 22k 8 C84 0.1u/16 T271 5 6 4 C85 1000p/50 + - V+ 7 T272 T270 R126 200 T273 Q10 2SC5658 U5B T274 V3R3 J8 R128 2 RIBENC 1k 1 2 3 4 T275 T276 R129 10k C87 1000p/50 R130 100 V3R3 R131 22k R132 2 HDUSENS T278 1k R127 75/1%/2012 B4B-PH-K-K RIBBON ENCODER Black J9 B2B-PH-K-K V3R3 U19B 7 + - R208 3.3k 2 RIBSENS C86 *1000p/50 LED A LED K TR C TR E 1 2 C88 1000p/50 A V3R3 T279 6 5 uPC393GR-9LG V3R3 R135 10k T280 R133 1k 1 2 3 R134 1M C89 1000p/50 HEAD UP Black J10 A B3B-PH-K-S RIBBON END Title T281 Size R136 10k A4 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2 3 4 5 6-12 6 (9/15) MAIN PCB - SENSOR Number Revision JN66701-0 Date: File: 1 B VBA2904 A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 10/15) [Power/Buzzer/Fan] 1 2 3 4 U26 T376 J11 T286 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 6 V3R3 V5 V24R0 D 5 + C93 47u/35 Vin V1R5 1 GND 8 U21 3 + 2 V3R3 T284 Vout 7 C90 1u/B16 C94 47u/35 6 4 T283 D BH15MA3WHFV 2 VI O1 O2 3 STB N VSS T282 C91 1u/B16 5 C92 0.1u/16 NJM2391DL1-33 T287 B10B-EH POWER R137 0/2012 R204 0/2012 T288 V5R0 T372 R197 *10k V3R3 T374 C 6 V5ON 2,14 RESET T373 R198 *22k R199 Q22 *2SJ518 C114 *0.1u/16 T375 *10k Q24 *2SC5658 Q23 *2SC5658 C V24R0 R138 240/3216 T289 1 R140 3.3k/3216 + BZ1 PKM13EPYH4002-B0 R141 1k/3216 2 D7 RB521S T290 10k 10k 2 BUZZER Q11 DTC114EM V24R0 B B D8 SFPB66 T291 J12 1 2 3 B3B-EH-K R142 2 FANCTL T293 1k 2SK3577 Q12 FAN CNT R143 22k V3R3 R145 2 FANLOCK 1k R144 22k T294 C95 1000p/50 A A Title MAIN PCB - POWER / BUZZER / FAN (10/15) Size A4 Number 1 2 3 4 5 6-13 6 Revision JN66701-0 Date: File: A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 11/15) [RFID/Ope-Pane] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V3R3 8 V5R0 J13 R146 22k Jumber Setting for each RF-ID module D Standard Custom Type R147 R148 R149 R150 NA NA 0 0 0 0 NA NA TXD1 RXD1 2 TXD1 2 RXD1 R147 R148 R149 R150 2 RFRUN 2 RFOSC *0 *0 0 0 T295 T296 T297 T298 RFRUN RFOSC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 D B10B-ZR RF-ID V3R3 R151 22k V3R3 R152 22k J14 V5R0 T299 DACIN DACCLK CS_LCD LCD_CD 6 6 6 6 LCD_LED1 LCD_LED2 LCD_LED3 LCD_LED4 T300 T301 T302 T303 T304 T305 6 6 6 6 10k Q13 DTC114EM Q15 DTC114EM Q14 DTC114EM T306 T307 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 10k 2,3 2,3 6 6 10k C Q16 DTC114EM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 C 22FMN-BMT-A-TF OPE PANE V3R3 B 2 CV_OPN R191 1k R190 22k B C113 1000p/50 V5R0 J20 1 2 3 4 T378 R205 180/2012 B4B-PH-K-S A A Title Size A4 Number CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2 3 4 5 6-14 6 Revision JN66701-0 Date: File: 1 (11/15) MAIN PCB - RFID / OPE-PANE A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 12/15) [Cutter/Rewinder] 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 Option Select Cutter Rewinder Peeler None CPRTYP0 Low High Low High CPRTYP1 High Low Low High D D V3R3 V3R3 DCMTR0 DCMTR1 6 6 2 HPSENS0 HPSENS1 MTTH R156 R157 R158 R159 R160 1k V24R0 J15 R153 22k 2 2 VREF R154 22k 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 R155 3.3k/1% T308 1k 1k 1k 100 T309 T310 T311 T312 C96 1000p/50 C97 1000p/50 C98 1000p/50 B11B-PASK CUTTER & REWINDER C V3R3 V3R3 R161 1k 6 6 CPRTYP0 CPRTYP1 3 MTREF C R162 1k V3R3 V3R3 V5R0 J16 B R163 22k 2 2 MTENC OPN R165 100 T313 R166 100 T315 C99 1000p/50 R164 22k C100 1000p/50 B7B-PASK V3R3 2 R168 PEELSENS REWINDER T316 R167 2.4k/1% D9 *RB521S 100 B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 T317 R169 3.3k/1% A A Title Size A4 MAIN PCB - CUTTER/REWINDER Number JN66701-0 Date: File: 1 2 3 4 5 6-15 6 (12/15) Revision A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 13/15) [Centronics I/F] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 OBDIR D 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 xACKNLG BUSY PE SLCT xFAULT DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 DATA[7:0] DATA[7:0] xSTROBE xATFD-XT xPRIME xSLCT-IN PLH R170 100 T326 C101 12p/50 U22A V3R3 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 11 12 13 14 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 HD A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 PLHIN A14 A15 A16 A17 HLH 8 J17 DIR Y9 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 PLH C14 C15 C16 C17 HLHIN 48 47 46 45 44 43 41 40 38 37 36 35 33 32 30 29 28 27 26 25 74LVX161284 C T318 xSTROBE T319 DAT0 T320 DAT1 T321 DAT2 T322 DAT3 T323 DAT4 T324 DAT5 T325 DAT6 T327 DAT7 T328 xACKNLG T329 BUSY T330 PE T331 T332 T333 T334 SLCT xPRIME xATFD-XT xFAULT V3R3 V5R0 R171 3.3k T335 xSLCT-IN T336 C102 *12p/50 xRESET V3R3 2 C IEEE1284 4 3 -GRESET D PS-40PE-D4T1 1 5 U23 2,6,8 C103 *0.1u/16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 *74AHCT1G125 V3R3 B V5R0 R172 22k V3R3 U22B GND GND GND GND R174 R175 6 IETYP0 6 IETYP1 7 VCC 18 VCC 31 VCC_CABLE 42 VCC_CABLE C104 10u/10 B R173 22k T337 T338 3.3k 3.3k C105 0.1u/16 10 15 39 34 74LVX161284 NOT CONNECTED NETWORK BD CENTRO CN IETYP0 HIGH LOW HIGH IETYP1 HIGH HIGH LOW A A Title Size A4 Number CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2 3 4 5 6-16 6 Revision JN66701-0 Date: File: 1 (12/15) MAIN PCB - CENTRONICS I/F A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 14/15) [Serial I/F] 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 RS232C I/F V5R0 FG1 D D Lock_pin J18 T339 T340 T341 T342 T343 V3R3 C106 1u/B16 U24 19 C107 1u/B16 C109 1u/B16 C T344 2 4 T346 T347 5 6 T349 2 2 6 2 TXD0 LDTR0 PLDRXDI LDSR0 2,10 13 12 15 10 TXD0 LDTR0 RXD0 LDSR0 1 20 RESET 18 Vcc C1+ V+ 3 T345 TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR V5R4 C108 1u/B16 C1- V5R4 C2+ V- 7 C217 8 16 9 T1I T2I R1O R2O T1O T2O R1I R2I EN SHDN 11 NC1 14 NC2 T348 C110 1u/B16 R176 3.3k T350 T352 R178 R179 *0 0 R180 R181 *0 0 R177 *3.3k 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 C DBR40-251F100 T351 DTR FG2 Lock_pin GND ZT3222LEEY B R176 R177 R178 R179 R180 B R181 RTS NA 0 0 NA 0 NA DTR 0 NA NA 0 NA 0 A A Title Size A4 Number 2 3 4 5 6-17 6 Revision JN66701-0 Date: File: 1 (14/15) MAIN PCB - SERIAL I/F A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 15/15) [USB I/F] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 V3R3 D 10k D 10k Q17 DTA114EM T353 V3R3 U25B 2 R182 1k USBON 4 6 5 R183 1.5k 74VHC132 U25C 2 8 UBINTP U25A 9 T356 1 3 2 10 74VHC132 C T354 T357 R184 T358 20k/1% R185 0/2012 T359 USBVCC R186 R187 R188 24/2012 24/2012 0/2012 T360 T361 T362 DM DP USBLGND 74VHC132 2 2 J19 UDM UDP U25E U25D B 12 V 11 T363 G 13 DUSB-BRA42 R189 30k/1% C111 33p/50 C 1 VCC 2 DM 3 DP 4 GND SG5 USB I/F V3R3 B 14 7 C112 0.1u/16 74VHC132 74VHC132 A A Title Size A4 Number CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2 3 4 5 6-18 6 Revision JN66701-0 Date: File: 1 (15/15) MAIN PCB - USB I/F A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 C47 CN1 F1 INPUT 1 2 Q7 470 3 20 8 13 10 11 12 5 14 3 9 OVP T-OFF F/B T-ON 1 2 4 18 6 7 CF ON/OFF 15 NC NC 16 CT NC 17 E GND 19 DET CLM+ NC M51995AFP (MITSUBISHI) C35 R58 1/4W 100k 4 6-19 Q8 AC100V/240V(85-264V) 5 200V 1A 1DL42A (TOSHIBA) D13 IC3 CLM- VOUT C +24V + 5V FB5 6 MIN 0.04A 0.10A TYP 5.00A 1.50A 128W Size Title A4 Date: File: 7 Number R240 2200pF R211 DA200 80V 0.1A 1SS301 (TOSHIBA) R210 5.1B ZD202 15B ZD203 1/4W 10k C203 0.47uF C229 1/4W 10k 1/4W 10k R236 1/4W 10k R235 1/4W 10k R234 1/4W 10k R233 1/4W 10k R225 R224 15B ZD200 35V 6800uF 7 0.1uF 1/4W 220 C225 1/4W 220 R239 35V 1000uF C217 1/4W 10 SWo Vos 2200pF 1/4W 10 1/4W 10 Vin S.S DS202 SI-8050J YG802C04R (F.E) 40V 10A C213 R218 R215 IC102 (SANKEN) C211 R219 0 1/4W 10 R213 1 1/8W 470 Q200 C207 PI1 PI2:B C206 0.033uF 1k R204 1/4W 470 R209 1/4W 470 R205 0.1uF 1/4W 0 GND R217 R212 4 1/4W 470 27k R206 C202 DS204 35V 6800uF (NIHON INTER) 400V 16A RN1402 (TOSHIBA) 10k-10k 0 TB FCF16A40 500 1k C205 R203 0.01uF - C204 R202 TA - 5 PI1:B T1 PI1 R201 2 MM1431ANR IC200 2kV 100pF 630V 0.01uF C28 2W 47k 3 3 D9 6 0.022uF 200V 1A CRH01 (TOSHIBA) 2W 68 R47 R48 2W 47k 1NU41 (TOSHIBA) D8 R200 2W 47 VR200 FB4 R65 2W 27k FSU10A60 (NIHON INTER) FB3 600V 10A C200 500V 220pF 3.3k Q6 70BB 1000V 8A 2SK2613 (TOSHIBA) C31 R54 1/4W 10k R42 1/4W 270k - R208 30B ZD3 R49 2W 27k R38 - 1/4W 270k D4 27k R207 TF1 125 2W 27k R64 R43 1/4W 270k R66 R44 1/4W 270k 630V 0.047uF C40 1/4W 270k 1/4W 270k R70 5 R214 R216 C215 50V 5A 2SA1244-Y/Q (TOSHIBA) L4 1/4W 4.7 10uH R61 1SS355 (ROHM) D18 40V 1A CRS04 (TOSHIBA) 200V 1A CRH01 (TOSHIBA) D12 - R39 - R69 R40 450V 220uF C25 2kV 220pF 2SK3569/Q 600V 10A (TOSHIBA) C22 R32 2W 47 4 250V 1500pF FG R60 R88 1/4W 100 D7 0.01uF C26 18k R72 3.9k 80V 0.1A 1SS355 (ROHM) R82 R94 - D11 R62 VCC R97 D16 70BB 5W 0.1 R79 - UDZS30B(ROHM) ZD4 C41 1/4W 47 C39 R78 1/4W 82 30B 56uF 1/4W 47 R76 TLP421 (TOSHIBA) R67 2W 100k - PI2:A R71 2W 100k R81 Q12 47 D15 820k 80V 0.1A 1SS355 (ROHM) CRH01 (TOSHIBA) 200V 1A 3 R73 10k 330k C33 R56 0.15uF R86 VF 33k (F.E) R80 GND 10k FA5502 22k R74 14 SYNC 7 C34 CS C46 0.22uF REF 9 8 4 6 D17 ON/OFF VIN5 VFB CT 3.9k 10 47uF VC 22k R87 1/4W 47 0.022uF 1/8W 220k D14 R84 80V 0.1A 1SS355 (ROHM) VCC 1/4W 2.2 R89 OVP C27 IC1 200V 1A CRH01 (TOSHIBA) C30 OUT IFB R30 0.022uF IIN- 1/4W 10k C36 VDET 70BB D6 35V 150uF D10 1/8W 0 1/4W 47 R29 40V 1A 0.22uF IDET R27 C43 R28 FB2 Q3 0.22uF 1/4W 2.2 C32 DS2 0.22uF 1/4W 10k R25 33k R26 2SK3569/Q 600V 10A (TOSHIBA) 2 C29 R91 50V 5A 2SA1244-Y/Q (TOSHIBA) 40V 1A 1/8W 0 R92 200V 1A CRH01 (TOSHIBA) 70BB D5 50V 0.15A 2SA1162Y (TOSHIBA) 40V 1A CRS04 (TOSHIBA) D3 L3 CZ59303-G 1/4W 2.2 22k R90 FB1 Q2 R55 1/4W 10 R63 1/4W 27 R23 C13 16 3 2 1 12 15 13 11 1uF 1/4W 10 R24 R20 C37 0.1uF C7 630V 1.0uF R3 470pF R53 C38 R96 1/4W 2.2 470 R51 R59 100k 1/8W 27 R21 TLP421 (TOSHIBA) C20 5.6k R46 1/4W 220k D PI1:A 0.1uF 0.1uF C45 0.047uF - R57 33k R45 100pF 220pF C17 R95 R12 1/4W 220k R93 Z1 1/4W 220k R15 0.1uF R50 100k R75 1/4W 33k 5W 0.1 Q1 R52 100 R68 C23 0.1uF C21 C49 2.2k R41 0.01uF 470pF C19 18B LB C9 C6 RN1402 (TOSHIBA) 10k-10k 275V 0.68uF 120B R1 120B 275V 0.33uF UDZS18B(ROHM) ZD7 DS1 600V 10A D10XB60H (SHINDENGEN) LA 1/8W 68k ZD5 1/4W 100k C3 C4 250V 1500pF 1.2mH HR24-122 (KOURINGIKEN) 680V R83 ZD6 C2 C 5W 0.1 1/8W 68k C1 R77 1/4W 100k 250V 1500pF L2 R14 1/8W 68k B 1.2mH HR24-122 (KOURINGIKEN) L1 R2 10 R85 250V T10AH 1 35V 56uF N FG L Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Power Supply PCB (100/240V)) 8 FCF16A40 DS200 (NIHON INTER) CZ62301-G D 400V 16A 1000V 1A JN6601-0 +24V 10 +24V 9 +24V 8 +24V 7 GND 6 GND 5 GND 4 GND 3 GND(+5V) 2 +5V 1 CN200 6 FG Notes: 1. Part whose constant is shown as "-" is not mounted. 2. Unless otherwise specified, wattage of resistor is 1/10W and work voltage of capacitor is 50V. 3. Specification of this power supply is as follows. A C 80V 0.1A 5 R220 2 100uH L104 B MAX 12.8A 1.50A 315W 70BB A POWER SUPPLY Revision Sheet of Drawn By: A 8 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Ope-pane PCB) 1 2 3 V5R0 4 5 6 7 8 V3R3 + C401 47u/16 + C402 47u/16 J401 D T401 T402 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 D T403 R401 R402 R403 R404 T404 T406 T408 T410 T412 T413 T422 T423 T405 1k/1608 1k/1608 1k/1608 1k/1608 T407 T409 T411 LCD_SDI LCD_SCK CS_LCD LCD_CD V3R3 R405 1M LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 T415 T417 T419 T420 T425 T426 T428 J403 1 2 3 4 T427 T429 C408 C409 C410 C411 C412 C413 C414 *0.1u/50 *0.1u/50 *0.1u/50 *0.1u/50 *0.1u/50 *0.1u/50 *0.1u/50 *0.1u/50 C C407 T430 J402 C404 0.1u/50 T414 T416 T418 T424 T421 C405 1u/25 V5R0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 22FMN-BMT-A-TF C403 0.1u/50 R406 180/2012 1 4 2 3 C406 1u/25 B4B-PH-K-S LCD_SDI LCD_SCK LCD_CD V5R0 V5R0 T431 T433 R407 D402 310DT ERROR T434 SW1 D403 332MG EVPADC04K T435 D404 332MG SW2 V5R0 B3 B4 SW402 A3 B2 A4 R409 180/2012 A3 B2 A4 T436 A1 B1 A2 D405 332MG A3 B2 A4 B4 PAUSE PAD401 Anode T432 B SW3 PAD402 Catiode EVPADC04K R411 SW404 16/1608 SW403 A1 B1 A2 R410 FEED 180/2012 C 30FLH-SM1-TB EVPADC04K B4 B4 A3 B2 A4 B3 B3 A1 B1 A2 LED2 180/2012 NC NC NC NC VOUT VB0+ VB0VB1VB1+ VSS VDD BM1 BM0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3/SDA D2 D1 D0/SCK WR1 WR0 CD RST /CS NC NC NC NC SW401 A1 B1 A2 B R408 LED1 180/2012 B3 D401 310MT POWER CS_LCD V5R0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 LED4 R412 180/2012 STOP SW4 EVPADC04K T437 D406 332MG R413 180/2012 MENU A A LED3 Title Size A4 OPE-PANE PCB Number 1 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2 3 4 5 6-20 6 Revision JN66704-0 Date: File: A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Centronics PCB) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 V5R0 J101 1 2 D R101 1k D RE-H022TD-1130 V5R0 IEEE1284 CN101 C B CN102 xSTROBE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 xSTROBE DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 xACKNLG BUSY PE SLCT xATFD-XT DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 S.GND F.GND VCC/PLH S.GND S.GND S.GND S.GND S.GND S.GND S.GND S.GND S.GND S.GND S.GND S.GND xPRIME xFAULT S.GND DATA7 xACKNLG BUSY V5R0 PE SLCT xPRIME xATFD-XT xFAULT R102 1k(NA) T101 FUSE xSLCT-IN xSLCT-IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 C B 57RE-40360-830B(D29) xPRIME xATFD-XT SLCT BUSY PE DATA7 xACKNLG DATA6 DATA5 DATA4 DATA3 DATA2 DATA0 xFAULT A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 A DATA1 xSTROBE PS-40PE-D4T1-B1 CN103 Title PS-40PE-D4T1-B1 Size A4 CENTRO PCB / CENTRONICS I/F CIRCUIT Number Date: File: 1 2 3 4 5 6-21 6 Revision JM66825-1 A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Connect PCB) (CL-S700/CL-S703) 1 2 3 4 5 6 V24R0 V24R0 J801 D DCMTR0 DCMTR1 HPSENS0 HPSENS1 MTTH CPRTYP0 J802 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 V5R0 B11B-EH R801 C 1.5k V5R0 4 N V G TC7SH04 Q801 DTC114EM 3.3k C 2 3 10k R802 5 U801 10k J803 B D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 B11B-PASK MTREF MTENC OPN PEELSENS CPRTYP1 8 7 V5R0 J804 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 B B5B-PH-K-S B7B-PASK A A Title Size A4 SA, CONNECT PCB Number 1 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 2 3 4 5 6-22 6 Revision JN66725-0 Date: File: A Sheet of Drawn By: 7 8 Chapter 6 Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Rewinder PCB) (CL-S700R) $ "# *%"# & ' ' $ ! %"# "# ! !!' ) # # ' % (# % (# ! + + ! %"# ) ' ! %"# ! !!' ')' ! !' ) %"# + + # ,-./ ! !' ')' 6-23 ,7/ 8-/9 ,./9 ? "01/2 ' ! /3,4,56 ://- 5< 28=6 !>9 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Appendices APPENDICES CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Appendices Appendices Table of Contents A. B. External Size Diagram .................................................................................................... AP-3 Mounting Diagrams......................................................................................................... AP-4 B-1. Main PCB ........................................................................................................... AP-4 B-2. Power Supply PCB (100V/220V) ....................................................................... AP-5 B-3. Ope-pane PCB ................................................................................................... AP-7 B-4. Centro PCB ........................................................................................................ AP-7 B-5. Connect PCB (CL-S700/CL-S703)..................................................................... AP-8 B-6. Rewinder PCB (CL-S700R) ............................................................................... AP-8 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R AP-2 A. A. Appendices External Size Diagram External Size Diagram Unit: mm (inch) Approx. 265 (10.4) [CL-S700/CL-S703] Approx. 255 (10) Approx. 490 (19.3) [CL-S700R] AP-3 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Appendices B. Mounting Diagrams B. Mounting Diagrams B-1. Main PCB [Main PCB - Parts side] CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R AP-4 B. B-2. Appendices Mounting Diagrams Power Supply PCB (100V/220V) [Power Supply PCB - Parts side] AP-5 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Appendices B. Mounting Diagrams [Power Supply PCB - Solder side] CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R AP-6 B. B-3. Ope-pane PCB [Parts side] B-4. Appendices Mounting Diagrams [Solder side] Centro PCB CN101 AP-7 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Appendices B. Mounting Diagrams B-5. Connect PCB (CL-S700/CL-S703) B-6. Rewinder PCB (CL-S700R) CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R AP-8 363 Van Ness Way, Suite 404 Torrance, CA 90501. USA Tel: (310) 781-1460 Fax:(310) 781-9152 http://www.citizen-systems.com Mettinger Strasse 11 Park House, 643-651 Staines Road D-73728, Esslingen Feltham, Middlesex, TW14 8PA Germany United Kingdom Tel: +49 (0) 711 3906 420 Tel: +44 (0) 20 8893 1900 Fax:+49 (0) 711 3906 405 Fax:+44 (0) 20 8893 0080 http://www.citizen-europe.com 6-1-12, Tanashi-cho, Nishi-Tokyo-shi Tokyo, 188-8511. Japan Tel: +81 (0) 42 468 4608 Fax:+81 (0) 42 468 4996 http://www.citizen-systems.co.jp エラー! 指定したスタイルは使われていません。 エラー! 参照元が見つかりません。 CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R 1-ii
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Encryption : Standard V1.2 (40-bit) User Access : Print, Modify, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res Tagged PDF : No XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Company : CITIZEN Source Modified : D:20101215045820 Category : CL-S700/CL-S703/CL-S700R Creator Tool : Word 用 Acrobat PDFMaker 7.0.7 Modify Date : 2010:12:15 14:09:25+09:00 Create Date : 2010:12:15 13:59:27+09:00 Metadata Date : 2010:12:15 14:09:25+09:00 Document ID : uuid:765cfb30-505d-482b-9c00-87958137a566 Instance ID : uuid:f1a32b84-67f9-413f-adc6-c08f1167ca60 Version ID : 49 Format : application/pdf Title : CL-S700 Technical Manual Creator : CITIZEN SYSTEMS Description : Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer Headline : Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer Has XFA : No Page Count : 257 Page Layout : OneColumn Language : EN-US Subject : Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer Author : CITIZEN SYSTEMS Warning : [Minor] Ignored duplicate Info dictionaryEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools